Design Guide for Buildings - University of the West of England

Design Guide for Buildings - University of the West of England Design Guide for Buildings - University of the West of England

12.07.2015 Views

UWE FacilitiesDesign Guide for BuildingsIssue 01

UWE Facilities<strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Issue 01


This page is intentionally blank


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>UWE Facilities<strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Contents:Part 1Part 2Part 3Part 4Part 5Part 6Part 7IntroductionSpace StandardsGeneral <strong>Design</strong>B&CE RequirementsM&E RequirementsSpecialist InstallationsWayfindingAssociated Suite <strong>of</strong> UWE <strong>Design</strong> Documents:<strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>B&CE Model SpecificationM&E Model SpecificationGeneric Room Data Sheets & Standard Finishes SchedulesUWE Safety PackDrawing Production CAD Standards ProtocolsEnergy Management DocumentComment on <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>This <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> and <strong>the</strong> associated suite <strong>of</strong> documents have been produced to assist externaldesign consultants in <strong>the</strong>ir designs <strong>for</strong> all UWE properties and is based on past UWE experiences. Itdoes not absolve external design consultants <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir legal or contractual responsibilities under healthand safety legislation, statutory requirements or design liability.i


This page is intentionally blank


UWE Facilities<strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>R Block Phase 2 completed 2010Part 1Introduction


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>IndexPart 1Introduction1.1.1 Introduction to UWE1.1.2 Vision & Mission1.1.3 Strategic plan1.1.4 Master plan1.2 Scope <strong>of</strong> this document1.3 Project Governance1.3.1 Project Management Documentation1.4 General <strong>Design</strong> Principles1.4.1 12 Principles <strong>for</strong> effective project co-ordination1.4.2 <strong>Design</strong> Risk Evaluation1.5 Sustainable <strong>Buildings</strong>1.5.1 <strong>Design</strong> and Operation1.5.2 Materials & Environmental Issues1.6 Economic Evaluation <strong>of</strong> Building Projects1.7 <strong>University</strong> Environment1.8 Departures from Standards and Specifications1.9 Documentation Ownership & UpdatingPart 2Part 3Part 4Part 5Part 6Part 7Space StandardsGeneral <strong>Design</strong>B&CE RequirementsM&E RequirementsSpecialist InstallationsWayfindingFrenchay, R Block InteriorComment on <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>This <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> has been produced to assist external design consultants in <strong>the</strong>ir designs <strong>for</strong> allUWE properties and is based on past UWE experiences. It does not absolve external designconsultants <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir legal or contractual responsibilities under health and safety legislation, statutoryrequirements or design liability.Index


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>1 Introduction1.1.1 Introduction to UWEThe <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>West</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>England</strong> (UWE) is a modern, growing university in <strong>the</strong> thrivingharbour side city <strong>of</strong> Bristol. UWE Bristol is one <strong>of</strong> Britain's most popular universities, witharound 30,000 students and 3,000 staff and is <strong>the</strong> largest provider <strong>of</strong> Higher Education in<strong>the</strong> South <strong>West</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>England</strong>. Students come to UWE from all parts <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> UK, as well as asignificant and growing number <strong>of</strong> international students from over 140 countriesworldwide.UWE consists <strong>of</strong> 4 main campuses and three smaller business units within a 10 mile radius<strong>of</strong> Bristol City Centre. In total all UWE campuses cover an area <strong>of</strong> 63 hectares, consisting <strong>of</strong>circa 170 buildings with a combined total gross internal area <strong>of</strong> 212,082m2. There are 4Main Faculties Supported by Facilities and o<strong>the</strong>r Support Services. These Faculties are:• Business and Law (FBL)• Arts, Creative Industries and Education (ACE).• Environment and Technology (FET)• Health and Life Sciences (HLS)1.1.2 Vision and MissionOur vision is to be <strong>the</strong> UK's best Knowledge and Learning Partnership <strong>University</strong>.Our mission is to make a positive difference to our students, business and society.Our ethos <strong>of</strong> genuine partnership working enables U+WE to successfully promote anddrive opportunity, social justice, creativity and innovation.Toge<strong>the</strong>r U+WE will INSPIREOur focus: Innovation - to pioneer and advance in all we do. We will be connected,engaged and enterprising• Nurturing talent - to provide an excellent staff experience. We will encouragedevelopment and value excellence across <strong>the</strong> broad range <strong>of</strong> activities that areimportant at UWE. We will make sure we achieve this in a healthy and sustainableworking environment• Student experience - to provide an excellent student experience. We will be <strong>the</strong> best <strong>for</strong>student representation; <strong>the</strong> best <strong>for</strong> preparing graduates <strong>for</strong> work and life aftergraduation; and <strong>the</strong> best <strong>for</strong> supporting student learning and well-being in a vibrant,healthy and sustainable learning environment• Participation - to raise aspirations and widen participation in higher education. We willengage and excite learners with <strong>the</strong> opportunities <strong>of</strong> an innovative and dynamicuniversity experience• Internationalisation - to be globally connected through our staff, students andcurriculum. We will be a regional <strong>University</strong> with a strong global outlook. We willprovide international opportunities, and experience <strong>for</strong> our students and staff, both athome and abroad• Research - to produce world-class research in areas <strong>of</strong> growth. We will engage inresearch that is relevant to society and which feeds back into our learning, teaching,and knowledge exchange• Exchange - to make knowledge exchange and public engagement thrive throughout<strong>the</strong> university. We will ensure we are a first-rate partner <strong>for</strong> businesses, <strong>the</strong>public-sector and communities. We will work with our partners to produce choices andsolutions <strong>for</strong> today, and <strong>for</strong> tomorrow's world.Part 1 | I ntroduction1 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>1.1.3 Strategic PlanThis document is available on <strong>the</strong> UWE website and outlines <strong>the</strong> vision and mission in moredetail.See:http://www1.uwe.ac.uk/aboutus/visionandmission1.1.4 Master PlanUWE Board <strong>of</strong> Governors Agreed a Paper “Towards a master Plan ImplementationStrategy” in November 2010 which sets out <strong>the</strong> background to <strong>the</strong> future development <strong>of</strong><strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong>.All proposals should be considered in conjunction with this Strategy.1.2 Scope <strong>of</strong> this DocumentThis design guide has been developed to ensure that any future building, whe<strong>the</strong>r new buildor refurbishment, is designed with <strong>the</strong> same parameters and principles. This document hasbeen developed to enable any <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> design team or contractor to have a broadunderstanding <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> principles that UWE will require to be adopted <strong>for</strong> any futuredevelopments, <strong>the</strong> guide is primarily designed to stage C (Concept) <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Royal Institute <strong>of</strong>British Architects (RIBA) stages. Obviously <strong>the</strong> actual extent and scope <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> design guideto be incorporated <strong>for</strong> any future development will be based upon <strong>the</strong> specific projectsrequirements.This document has been produced to ensure that all new university property and anyrefurbishment <strong>of</strong> older properties within <strong>the</strong> universities portfolio are developed to aconsistently high standard.This document is a part <strong>of</strong> a suite <strong>of</strong> documents that should be read in conjunctionconsisting <strong>of</strong>:Part 1 | I ntroduction2 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>• <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>• Room Data Sheets & Standard Finishes Schedules• UWE Safety Pack• B&CE Model Specification• M&E Model Specification• Energy Management Document1.3 Project Governance1.3.1 Project Management DocumentationEffective project management helps ensure that projects are delivered to <strong>the</strong> agreedquality, within budget and on time at best whole life value. Projects are to be managedgiving cogitation to <strong>the</strong> principles set in Achieving Excellence in Construction suite <strong>of</strong>Procurement <strong>Guide</strong>s and managed in <strong>the</strong> spirit <strong>of</strong> Prince II:• Project Request – from Client• Brief – From Client• Project Initiation Plan / Project Plan – Agreed with Client– Aim <strong>of</strong> Project– Project Objectives– Quality Criteria– Project Team– Budgets– Management Structure– Communication/reporting plan– Milestones– Tolerances– Prerequisites / Dependencies– Risks and Contingency Plans1.4 General <strong>Design</strong> PrinciplesUWE aims to provide a safe and stimulating learning arena <strong>for</strong>students and staff, which is a prerequisite <strong>of</strong> good quality highereducation.The <strong>University</strong> has to ensure that students and staff continue toenjoy a safe, healthy and fully functional work environment with <strong>the</strong>minimum <strong>of</strong> operational failure.The accommodation must be attractive to students and be asignificant aid in marketing <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong> to <strong>the</strong> wider communityand potential students. <strong>Design</strong>ers are to consider <strong>the</strong> designphilosophy <strong>of</strong> buildings and <strong>the</strong> spaces between <strong>the</strong>m.All aspects <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> development must be undertaken and deliveredto a high quality.Corporate branding should enhance <strong>the</strong> identity <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong>.UWE’s Facilities Service has an obligation to ensure that <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong> estate is runefficiently including high utilization and low maintenance. UWE operates within a dynamicPart 1 | I ntroduction3 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>environment which is influenced by many external factors including, technology,educational practices, market changes and government policy. Flexibility is crucial andconsequently <strong>the</strong> buildings that accommodate <strong>the</strong> university must be designed to facilitate<strong>the</strong>se strategic changes as far as practically achievable and af<strong>for</strong>dable.The <strong>University</strong> will benchmark <strong>the</strong> design <strong>of</strong> its buildings in terms <strong>of</strong>:• Sustainability• Quality• <strong>Design</strong> & Functionality• Value <strong>for</strong> Money• Life Cycle CostAll construction projects will be subject to a post completion review, with new builds andmajor refurbishments incorporating hefce <strong>Guide</strong> to Post Occupancy Evaluation principles.1.4.1 12 Principles <strong>for</strong> Effective Project Co-ordinationThe <strong>University</strong> has identified 12 key principles that project teams should adhere to. Theseare designed to promote co-ordination between projects and to ensure <strong>the</strong> effectiveintegration <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> project into <strong>the</strong> wider campus and UWE Masterplan. Most detailedguidance on a number <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se items will be found in supplementary design guides:1. Take a whole-life view <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir project and its place in <strong>the</strong> wider master plan. This willinvolve considering <strong>the</strong> costs (financial and environmental) and risks <strong>of</strong> constructing,operating, maintaining, altering and demolishing <strong>the</strong>ir structures and surroundingstructures.2. Work collaboratively to achieve effective co-ordination and co-operation betweenprojects (workshops and meetings will be convened to facilitate this).3. Account <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> impact <strong>of</strong>, and on, concurrent and future construction projects, UWEoperations and <strong>the</strong> wider environment.4. Projects (and stages <strong>of</strong> projects) must be sequenced to enable <strong>the</strong> safe and efficientdelivery <strong>of</strong> construction projects and UWE’s continuing operations. This might include<strong>of</strong>f-site prefabrication.5. Staff and students must be adequately segregated from construction activities withappropriate security measures. Phased handovers are to be avoided where possible.6. Where possible, sections <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> campus will be designated as construction zones t<strong>of</strong>acilitate <strong>the</strong> safe and efficient delivery <strong>of</strong> a number <strong>of</strong> adjacent projects.7. The project must provide adequate access routes (<strong>for</strong> pedestrians, construction traffic,UWE deliveries, maintenance operations, emergency vehicles etc.). Pedestrianroutes must be accessible <strong>for</strong> persons with disabilities.8. Provide adequate space to allow safe and efficient construction and effective sitewaste management. This will include providing room <strong>for</strong> welfare and <strong>of</strong>fice facilities,storage and lay down areas etc.9. Services must be protected - When making connections to existing services, <strong>the</strong>project will consider <strong>the</strong> condition and capacity <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> existing services and upgradewhere necessary. Where services to o<strong>the</strong>r buildings will be disrupted, <strong>the</strong> scope <strong>of</strong><strong>the</strong> project must include provision <strong>of</strong> alternative supplies in advance <strong>of</strong> diversion ordisconnections.10. Waste streams must be <strong>for</strong>ecast, managed on site and recorded. Opportunities mustbe found during <strong>the</strong> design phase to reuse arisings (whe<strong>the</strong>r on this project, concurrentprojects or future projects) or identify opportunities <strong>for</strong> recycling.11. Asbestos will be completely removed prior to major refurbishments or demolitions.Part 1 | I ntroduction4 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>12. Lessons learned on one project will be shared <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> benefit <strong>of</strong> concurrent and futureprojects through workshops, meetings and briefing notesTo comply with <strong>the</strong>se principles it is necessary to consult widely with UWE Facilities -Estates, <strong>the</strong> master planning team, surrounding building users, specialist consultants and<strong>the</strong> project teams <strong>for</strong> adjacent projects.1.4.2 <strong>Design</strong> Risk EvaluationWhile UWE encourages innovation, certain design options have proven to bedisproportionately difficult, expensive or dangerous to manage and maintain. Periodically,this document (and supplementary design guides) might <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e expressly ban orstipulate <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> certain design options or highlight past problems. In o<strong>the</strong>r cases, <strong>the</strong>guides might ask <strong>for</strong> detailed design risk evaluations to explain <strong>the</strong> risks posed andmanagement controls required <strong>for</strong> those design options which introduce elevated risks orcosts during <strong>the</strong> operation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building. These design risk evaluations should berecorded on <strong>the</strong> UWE maintenance schedule and design risk evaluation <strong>for</strong>ms but can beaccompanied or replaced by annotated diagrams etc. These evaluations need to be signed<strong>of</strong>f by <strong>the</strong> UWE project lead and CDM coordinator.1.5 Sustainable <strong>Buildings</strong>1.5.1 <strong>Design</strong> and OperationUWE Bristol has achieved and is proud <strong>of</strong> its Green Gown Award and design teams shouldensure that <strong>the</strong>ir designs sit alongside and enhance this award.To ensure all new builds and refurbishments have <strong>the</strong> least impact on <strong>the</strong> environment and<strong>the</strong> maximum benefit <strong>for</strong> society and economy <strong>the</strong> project team is required to:Incorporate <strong>the</strong> following into all planning and design:– Minimum use <strong>of</strong> natural resources– Best business options available– Best practice energy efficiency– Best ecological options/opportunities– Consideration <strong>of</strong> recycled materials– Best community options available• Members <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> project team will be expected to incorporate <strong>the</strong>irpr<strong>of</strong>essional/chartered standards into any UWE building scheme design• Set targets to meet established benchmarks using all standards available. These willinclude schemes such as BREEAM, Green <strong>Guide</strong> to Specification, BRE SustainabilityCheck List, EPC targets and o<strong>the</strong>r relevant standards/methods <strong>of</strong> assessment.• Work with all stakeholders at <strong>the</strong> beginning <strong>of</strong> each project to establish what is neededra<strong>the</strong>r than wanted. This will include framework contractors, delivering <strong>the</strong> project.• Not lower <strong>the</strong> specification <strong>of</strong> environmental initiatives when <strong>the</strong>re is a conflict <strong>of</strong>interest with tender price. Instead UWE will look at <strong>the</strong> project in its entirety and identifypossible solutions.• Incorporate <strong>the</strong> principles <strong>of</strong> whole life costing at <strong>the</strong> design stage, including <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong>components (B&CE and M&E) which <strong>of</strong>fer <strong>the</strong> best whole life value ra<strong>the</strong>r thannecessarily <strong>the</strong> lowest initial installation price.• Evaluate and Incorporate new technologies and concepts at <strong>the</strong> design stage.• Ensure construction waste is dealt with in line with UWE’s Environmental Policy asfound on <strong>the</strong> UWE website.• Context <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> space with regard to physical landscape and buildingsSpecific aspects <strong>of</strong> sustainability will be fur<strong>the</strong>r detailed in General <strong>Design</strong>, Part 3.6.Part 1 | I ntroduction5 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Evaluation Process <strong>for</strong> Sustainable <strong>Design</strong>ManagementReviewEnergy use, subjective feedbackpost occupancy reviewsBenchmarkingAssessmentFeedbackSustainabilityStrategyDevelop BriefUWE <strong>Design</strong><strong>Guide</strong>sBREEAMStandardProcurementConsiderate contractorsscheme ‘rethink’ConstructionSustainableDevelopmentFeasibility StudyAssessmentCriteriaMaintenance, Water, H&S, Energymaterials, transport, land use, ecologyStatutoryControlDetailed <strong>Design</strong>Scheme <strong>Design</strong>PlanningBuilding Regs.SpecificationBREEAMUWE Specifications, National greenspec. Green guide to spec. Ove Arupgood practice guideAssessment, predictionchecklist1.5.2. Materials and Environmental Issues<strong>Design</strong>ers should consider <strong>the</strong> impact on <strong>the</strong> environment when selecting materials. Thefollowing list <strong>of</strong> some key principles is not intended to be conclusive but gives some areas tobe considered• Avoid <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> PVC materials• Use timber from certified sustainable sources• Seek locally sourced materials to reduce transport costs• Avoid over specification <strong>of</strong> cement content in concrete and consider cementsubstitutes if possible• Avoid <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> wood preservatives which may be harmful• Optimize <strong>the</strong> mass <strong>of</strong> high density materials to increase <strong>the</strong>rmal mass• Check <strong>for</strong> recycling pathways <strong>for</strong> high maintenance short life materials such as flooringand reduce accordingly.• Avoid solvents and use water based paints and stains were practical• Lime mortars to be used in preference to those which are cement based.• <strong>Design</strong> <strong>for</strong> minimum wastage• Consider factory components and prefabrication be<strong>for</strong>e on site manufacture.• Consider materials with low whole life carbon emissions and minimal use <strong>of</strong> naturalresources• Consider recyclability <strong>of</strong> materials at end <strong>of</strong> building lifePart 1 | I ntroduction6 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>1.6 Economic Evaluation <strong>of</strong> Building ProjectsIn accordance with UWE’s Environmental Policy, Whole Life Costing is to be undertaken <strong>for</strong>all projects in excess <strong>of</strong> £500,000. Although <strong>the</strong> methodology to be applied in <strong>the</strong>calculation <strong>of</strong> a Life Cycle Cost (LCC) will vary, <strong>the</strong>re are certain aspects which should beapplied to every project:• The LCC should include (at least) <strong>the</strong> total acquisition costs, maintenance, utilities andconsumables costs throughout <strong>the</strong> lifespan <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> equipment until estimatedobsolescence or disposal. It is essential that <strong>the</strong> running costs are kept to a minimumand are considered in order to build a business case which can be utilized to makein<strong>for</strong>med business investment decisions.• All recommendations regarding plant and equipment installations must be based uponLCC in<strong>for</strong>mation.• All Value Engineering (VE) exercises must be based upon sound WLC in<strong>for</strong>mation. Forexample; if a plant purchase is likely to save money on in-use costs, but have asubstantial impact upon <strong>the</strong> capital budget <strong>the</strong>n this should be taken into account inany decision.• Along with any cost model an evaluation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> item’s per<strong>for</strong>mance should be includedin order to establish <strong>the</strong> consequences <strong>of</strong> any trade <strong>of</strong>f in <strong>the</strong> purchasing decision.• Life cycle lengths should be presented as options within any models to enable UWE tomake in<strong>for</strong>med decisions regarding likely future usage pr<strong>of</strong>iles. The design team maybe required to provide energy certificates to be provided with <strong>the</strong> completed buildingin<strong>for</strong>mation.• All WLC models are to be shared amongst <strong>the</strong> design team and UWE in an electronic<strong>for</strong>mat to enable all parties to conduct a thorough investigation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> structure <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>model.• Post contract evaluations are to be undertaken (after a suitable time interval) to assess<strong>the</strong> actual building per<strong>for</strong>mance against <strong>the</strong> design per<strong>for</strong>mance.The design life expectancy <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building will be stated in <strong>the</strong> individual project particulars,however, it should be recognized that <strong>University</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong> are <strong>of</strong>ten retained far in excess<strong>of</strong> this notional figure, individual components <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e need to be robust in nature.LCC are to be carried out using best practiceas defined by <strong>the</strong> RICS, reference is to bemade to <strong>the</strong> BCIS/BSI publication PD156865Standardized Method <strong>of</strong> Life Cycle Costing<strong>for</strong> Construction Procurement (SMLCC): Asupplement to BS ISO 15686-5 <strong>Buildings</strong> &constructed assets - Service life planning -Part 5: Life cycle costing. Clause 1.7 <strong>of</strong>SMLCC defines LCC as '...an economicevaluation method that takes account <strong>of</strong> allrelevant costs over <strong>the</strong> defined time horizon(period <strong>of</strong> study), including adjusting <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong>time value <strong>of</strong> money...'. The differencebetween LCC and Whole Life Costs (WLC) isthat LCC is focused only on <strong>the</strong> construction,maintenance, operation and disposal <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>asset, whereas WLC additionally includesclient and user costs such as projectfinancing and occupancy costs.Part 1 | I ntroduction7 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>1.7 <strong>University</strong> EnvironmentThere are a number <strong>of</strong> significant and subtle differences in requirements between acommercial development and one suitable <strong>for</strong> use by a Higher Education establishment.The <strong>University</strong>’s requirements include but are not limited to:1.7.1 The End UsersThe end users <strong>of</strong> a higher education establishment are naturally exuberant and systemsneed to be robust to cater <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir needs.The estate needs to cater <strong>for</strong> a number <strong>of</strong> distinct groups <strong>of</strong> end users such as - staff, fulland part time students, occasional visitors, conference delegates and summer schoolsincluding children and those to whom English is not <strong>the</strong>ir first language.1.7.2 Population Movement1.7.3 Security<strong>University</strong> buildings have to cater <strong>for</strong> large numbers <strong>of</strong> person movements at times <strong>of</strong>changeover e.g. between lectures and at <strong>the</strong> start and end <strong>of</strong> day. Consideration needs tobe given to <strong>the</strong> space available to accommodate <strong>the</strong>se peaks.Enhanced security is required in certain areas but security arrangements have to cater <strong>for</strong><strong>the</strong> large numbers <strong>of</strong> persons that may need to use <strong>the</strong>m. See Access Controls Part 6.3.1.8 Departures from Standards and Specifications.Whilst design guide is planned to act as a per<strong>for</strong>mance specification, <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong> doesnot wish to be over prescriptive and wishes to allow any design team <strong>the</strong> freedom to beinnovative and <strong>for</strong>ward thinking. It will, <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e, accept departures from standards andspecifications. These departures will be allowed if <strong>the</strong>re is a specific and direct advantageto <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong>. Economic advantage will be evaluated using a whole life cost model toensure that <strong>the</strong> university obtains value <strong>for</strong> money through <strong>the</strong> life <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building (seesection 1.6). It is recognized that <strong>the</strong>re may be factors o<strong>the</strong>r than economic that may justifya departure from standard.1.9 Documentation Ownership & UpdatingUWE Facilities will update this design guide on an annualbasis, to ensure continued legislation compliance,industry best practice, university policy changes etc.Part 1 | I ntroduction8 | P age


UWE Facilities<strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>R Block InteriorPart 2Space Standards


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>IndexPart 1Part 2IntroductionSpace Standards2.1 Space Requirements in General2.2 Proposed Faculties and Departments2.3 Relationship Between sectors2.4 Room Data Sheets2.5 Requirements <strong>for</strong> all <strong>Buildings</strong>2.6 Space Standards2.6.1 Teaching and Learning Accommodations2.6.2 Teaching Spaces2.6.3 Library and IT Spaces2.6.4 Help Zones and Receptions2.6.5 Academic Offices2.6.6 Administration Offices2.6.7 Office Support Areas and Meeting Rooms2.6.8 Laboratory, Workshop and Teaching Kitchens2.6.9 Catering Facilities2.6.10 Sports Facilities2.6.11 Toilets2.7 Space Referencing2.8 Fire Door ReferencingPart 3Part 4Part 5Part 6Part 7General <strong>Design</strong>BC&E RequirementsM&E RequirementsSpecialist InstallationsWayfindingECC Lecture TheatreIndex


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Part 2Space Standards2.1 Space Requirements in GeneralThe <strong>University</strong> requires high quality, stimulating learning environments which areattractive to all users including staff, students and visitors. Recent research by CABE(Commission <strong>for</strong> Architecture and <strong>the</strong> Built Environment, http://www.cabe.org.uk/) showsthat:• Approximately 60% <strong>of</strong> students and staff indicated that <strong>the</strong> quality <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> buildingdesign had a positive impact on <strong>the</strong>ir decision to study or work at <strong>the</strong>ir chosenuniversity• Among staff, <strong>the</strong> quality <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> buildings had <strong>the</strong> most positive impact on <strong>the</strong>recruitment <strong>of</strong> academic staff (65%). Among students, <strong>the</strong> most positive impact wason <strong>the</strong> recruitment <strong>of</strong> postgraduate students (72%)• When asked to identify specific features <strong>of</strong> buildings that would most influence <strong>the</strong>irdecision to work in a particular institution, just over half <strong>of</strong> all staff identified cosmeticand environmental features as being most influential. These included cleanliness, afeeling <strong>of</strong> space and bright working areas. Most students identifiedstructural/functional features, including <strong>the</strong> quality <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> facilities, <strong>the</strong> library, sportscentre, atriums and lecture rooms• Only a very small number <strong>of</strong> ei<strong>the</strong>r staff or students (around 10%) pinpointedsituational features (i.e. where <strong>the</strong> building was located) as being influential in <strong>the</strong>irdecision to take up work or study at <strong>the</strong>ir institution. 1The estates costs are <strong>the</strong> second largest expenditure after personnel costs to <strong>the</strong><strong>University</strong>. UWE needs to maximise future utilisation <strong>of</strong> all building accommodation, withall space being as flexible and adaptive to accommodation future business operations.The ratio <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> gross internal area to <strong>the</strong> net internal area needs to be or exceed 65%.Space will <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e have to be managed to maximise its utilisation and <strong>the</strong> designs mustreflect this requirement.Research by <strong>the</strong> Space Management Group http://www.smg.ac.uk/resources.html, showsthat increases in utilisation can be limited by:• Poor condition and functional suitability• Poor environmental quality• Split sites• Specialist spaces and equipment that have a limited range <strong>of</strong> uses.• Accessibility and health and safety restrictions on space• Availability <strong>of</strong> audio-visual equipment and <strong>the</strong> layout <strong>of</strong> rooms.There<strong>for</strong>e all future designs must minimise <strong>the</strong> <strong>for</strong>e mentioned factors and mustincorporate <strong>the</strong> following basics to ensure space efficiencyWithin <strong>the</strong> building designs are achieved, <strong>the</strong>se include but are not limited to <strong>the</strong>following:• Maximise <strong>the</strong> physical footprint <strong>of</strong> new buildings and by modest additions andextensions in existing buildings• Match new uses to <strong>the</strong> existing built <strong>for</strong>m in refurbishment project• Provide a high ratio <strong>of</strong> usable area to gross built area1 The value <strong>of</strong> Good Building <strong>Design</strong> in Higher EducationPart 2 | S pace Standards1 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>• Capture balance areas <strong>for</strong> active use• Provide versatile space, furniture and fittings that can be used <strong>for</strong> different activities• Specify design features that allow different activities at different times• Optimise space standards <strong>for</strong> effective work• Create versatile <strong>of</strong>fice and research space, with appropriate open plan areas,supplemented by meeting and quiet spaces• Optimise furniture spaces <strong>for</strong> effective work• Provide <strong>for</strong> wireless data access to enable maximum effective use <strong>of</strong> common space 2In conclusion, all future designed UWE space needs to create a stunning and stimulatingleaning arena <strong>for</strong> students and staff. It must also be sufficiently flexible to meet <strong>the</strong>dynamic environment caused by market changes and government policy. Utilisation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>space needs to be high and any design must reflect this requirement.2.2 Proposed Faculty and DepartmentsThis section is to give in<strong>for</strong>mation on <strong>the</strong> faculty and which schools are to be housed in<strong>the</strong> building. The range <strong>of</strong> subjects, numbers <strong>of</strong> students, research students, number <strong>of</strong>staff (both administrative and academic) This section is to give a flavour to <strong>the</strong> designteam <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> amount and type <strong>of</strong> activity that will be taking place within <strong>the</strong> building.TO BE COMPLETED FOR EACH SEPARATE PROJECT2.3 Relationship between SectorsThis section is to allow <strong>the</strong> ideal relationship between specific rooms and faculties to bespecified e.g. ten person <strong>of</strong>fices adjacent to workshop, how many interview roomsadjacent to <strong>of</strong>fices.2.4 Room Data SheetsRoom data sheets are provided <strong>for</strong> each space at appendix 2.1. The generic descriptionsgiven below are <strong>for</strong> guidance with <strong>the</strong> room data sheets taking precedence over <strong>the</strong>guidance. The design team will be expected to update <strong>the</strong> room data sheets throughout<strong>the</strong> lifespan <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> project and include a completed, final version in <strong>the</strong> hand overdocumentation at <strong>the</strong> completion <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> project.2.5 Requirements in all <strong>Buildings</strong>For <strong>the</strong> efficient future management <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> completed building, a number <strong>of</strong> buildingmanagement facilities will be required. In addition to <strong>the</strong>se a number <strong>of</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r facilities area prerequisite in all buildings, <strong>the</strong>se include -• A cleaner’s room on each floor incorporating a cleaners sink with associated waterand drainage.• The numbers <strong>of</strong> required toilets will be calculated by <strong>the</strong> possible numbers <strong>of</strong> personswithin <strong>the</strong> building at a change in timetabled periods. Where possible, disabled toiletswill be provided within <strong>the</strong> main toilets or to be provided as close as possible.• Shower rooms, changing rooms and drying rooms will be provided dependant on <strong>the</strong>numbers <strong>of</strong> staff and students using <strong>the</strong> facilities.• Lobbies and Reception Areas need to be bright and welcoming and clearlydelineated, in order that visitors known where to report and gain in<strong>for</strong>mation.• Hub Rooms/Switch Rooms and /or communication cabinets2 Promoting space efficiency in building designPart 2 | S pace Standards2 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>• Waste storage will be required according to <strong>the</strong> waste strategy <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> building andsurrounding campus. The design team will review <strong>the</strong> existing strategy and updatewith consultations with <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong>.• First aid facilities• The design team will be required to develop and incorporate furniture layoutsorientation with UWE appointed framework furniture supplier at a later stage in <strong>the</strong>design process.2.6 UWE Space StandardsSpace CategoriesCategoryAcademic GeneralAcademic SpecialistAcademic ResearchAcademic Open AccessLibraryOfficeMeeting / EventStorageCommercial SocialCommercial O<strong>the</strong>rBasis <strong>of</strong> AllocationGeneral purpose teaching space including lecture <strong>the</strong>atres – centralprovision (i.e. shared space)Specialist and laboratory space – local provisionAdditional research space not covered by specialist space – localprovisionOpen access learning spaces, have traditionally been in <strong>the</strong> <strong>for</strong>m <strong>of</strong> pclabs but with <strong>the</strong> increase in <strong>the</strong> number <strong>of</strong> students with <strong>the</strong>ir own pcs,this is being reviewed in some areas to include facilities <strong>for</strong> group work /presentations – central and local provisionCentral library provision with some localised specialist facilities – centralwith some provisionCould be combined with open access facilitiesStaff, union <strong>of</strong>fice space – local provisionCentral with some local provisionCentral and local provisionRestaurant, café, bars – central provisionStudent accommodation, leased <strong>of</strong>fice space, conferencing and eventspace – central provisionSpace AllocationTeaching SpaceSpace minsqm perstudentLecture Theatre 1Teaching Room Large / DoubleDesks2.25Teaching Room Standard Desks 2Teaching Room Pallet Chairs 1.5PC Lab 2.75NotesCurrently 1 sqm however, many HEIs moving to1.3 to allow <strong>for</strong> more space per person andincorporate more interactive teaching methods.Part 2 | S pace Standards3 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Timetabled Space Utilisation Percentage NotesOccupancy 75%Timetabled number <strong>of</strong> occupants when room inuseFrequency 75%Timetabled amount <strong>of</strong> time a room is occupiedper weekTimetabled Space Utilisation Percentage NotesUtilisation 56%Occupancy x Frequency. Gives allowance <strong>for</strong>16% potential drop <strong>of</strong>f to achieve actualutilisation <strong>of</strong> 40%sqm percoursestudentsqm perresearchstudentAdditional areas <strong>for</strong> specialist accommodationLanguages and social psychology 0.80 0.80Ma<strong>the</strong>matics 1.10 1.10Education, traditional geography, archaeology 2.70 2.70Scientific geography 5.50 5.50Experimental psychology 6.90 6.90Architecture 6.55 6.55Art 6.5 6.5Music (departments <strong>of</strong> 50 students only) 7.50 7.50O<strong>the</strong>r studio 3.5Open Access learning Spaces (Includes open access pc labs). 0.275Laboratories and ancillary accommodation <strong>for</strong>:Biology 5.00 15.20Physics, engineering science, electronics 4.90 13.80Chemistry 5.00 14.25Nursing & AH 5.00 11.00Engineering laboratories, workshops, preparation, storage 3.95 14.30O<strong>the</strong>r laboratory 2.75Open Access learning Spaces (Includes open access pc labs). 0.275Library SpaceSpace min SQMper studentBasic provision 1.25Additional Area <strong>for</strong> Law School 1NotesIncludes reader space, book shelvingand support facilitiesIncludes reader space and additionalarchive book stacksOffice SpaceSpace min SQMper person NotesSingle Office with Meeting Space 15<strong>Design</strong>ated Senior Staff or specificrequirementSingle Office 9<strong>Design</strong>ated Senior Staff or specificrequirementShared / Open Plan Office 7.5 StaffPart 2 | S pace Standards4 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Office SpaceSpace min SQMper person NotesMeetings Area in Open Plan 2.5 Where group working a necessityMeetings Room 2.5Additional AdministrativeSpaceStudent facing administrativespaceSpace min SQM upto 3,000 students50NotesIncludes reception and hand in areasAn additional 10 sqm <strong>for</strong> eachsubsequent 1,000 students.Social Spacessqm per student / staffRestaurants / Cafés – dining areas 0.2Restaurants / Cafés – kitchens 0.17Communal areas – students 0.7Communal areas – staff 0.9Space requirements can be calculated by:Office Space: An allocation based on <strong>the</strong> types <strong>of</strong> staff, <strong>the</strong> actual staff numbers except<strong>for</strong> job share, hourly paid lecturers and o<strong>the</strong>r ‘hot-deskers’.Teaching and Specialist Space: Allocations based on teaching delivery requirement andopen access learning space / laboratory or o<strong>the</strong>r specialist requirement.Please note that <strong>the</strong> sizes specified <strong>for</strong> <strong>of</strong>fice space are not necessarily an entitlement butan overall measurement <strong>for</strong> different categories <strong>of</strong> staff.Storage should initially be considered as part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> allocation <strong>for</strong> <strong>of</strong>fice space. Additionalrequirements could be considered on an individual basis.Circulation, plant, void areas and facilities are calculated at 30% <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> total spacerequirement.2.6.1 Teaching and Learning RoomsThe following terms are used to define teaching and learning spaces.• Interview Rooms are private spaces where confidential matters can be discussed byfour or six people. Power, voice and data points are provided.• Seminar Rooms are <strong>for</strong> groups <strong>of</strong> up to 15 students where <strong>the</strong>y can work in anin<strong>for</strong>mal way or have <strong>for</strong>mal instruction. A requirement will be <strong>for</strong> staff to move around<strong>the</strong> working groups and give advice as necessary. These rooms will normally betimetabled or book able.• Teaching Rooms are equipped with furniture that can be rearranged in differentconfigurations to suit teaching styles. Teaching rooms should have infrastructure toallow different walls to be used as <strong>the</strong> teaching wall. Generally teaching spacesshould accommodate 25 students. Large teaching spaces <strong>for</strong> more than fiftyoccupants will require more than one entrance.• Social Learning Spaces are in<strong>for</strong>mal areas where students can congregate <strong>for</strong> groupwork on an ad hoc basis. There should be a variety <strong>of</strong> locations and size and suitable<strong>for</strong> self directed leaning as well as group work. There should be equipped withwireless networking and sufficient power points to allow laptops to be used.Part 2 | S pace Standards5 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>• Lecture Rooms have fixed furniture and are generally used <strong>for</strong> large numbers <strong>of</strong>students, housing in <strong>the</strong> region sixty plus students. They are planned to meet overallinstitutional needs and where possible link to o<strong>the</strong>r spaces to ease traffic flows.2.6.2 Areas <strong>of</strong> Teaching SpacesNo<strong>of</strong> PersonsThe following table gives approximate guides to <strong>the</strong> areas (m 2 ) required <strong>for</strong> teachingspacesSocial learning spaces have <strong>the</strong> largest range <strong>of</strong> student to area ratios and could varydependant on how <strong>the</strong> space is furnished.2.6.3 Spaces <strong>for</strong> Library and IT StudyStudy spaces should be created <strong>for</strong> twenty five students with additional area <strong>for</strong>associated teaching support requirements.2.6.4 Help ZonesInterviewRoomHelp Zones are <strong>the</strong> prime contact between Students, visitors and <strong>the</strong> university. Theyneed to be clearly visible welcoming and easy to find. Stand up PC's will be provided <strong>for</strong>shorter use.2.6.5 Academic OfficesOffice space will be open plan <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> majority <strong>of</strong> staff and will be planned to reflectbusiness environments where possible, <strong>of</strong>fice space must take account <strong>of</strong> spacesrequired to meet academic deliverables. The normal <strong>of</strong>fice allocation will be 7.5m 2perperson. Where cellular space is provided it will be:Single Office and Meeting space 15Single person <strong>of</strong>fice 9 m2Seminar2TeachingSpaceSocialLearningLectureRooms4 86 1010 20 3515 30 5530 50 10040 7060 100 5080 120 65100 150 75150 120200 150Open plan space will normally include some flexible open space <strong>for</strong> in<strong>for</strong>mal meetingsand is included within <strong>the</strong> specified areas.Part 2 | S pace Standards6 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>2.6.6 Administration OfficesAdministration <strong>of</strong>fices will also be open plan with a reception area. Account needs to betaken <strong>of</strong> queuing, enquiries and <strong>the</strong> protocols <strong>for</strong> handing in <strong>of</strong> academic course work.The normal <strong>of</strong>fice allocation will be 7.5m 2per person and maybe mixed with academicstaff.2.6.7 Office Support Areas and Meeting RoomsOffices need space to house copiers, pigeon holes and possible work bench dependingon <strong>the</strong> staff numbers.Interview rooms will generally be provided at <strong>the</strong> rate <strong>of</strong> 1 per 25 staff.Meeting rooms range from:Large Board Room (faculty) 70m 2 Smaller Board Room (department) 50m 2 Meeting Room35m 2 2Small Meeting Room (1 per 30 staff) 15mInterview rooms and small meeting rooms can be designed into internal spaces.2.6.8 Catering Facilities, Kitchens and Tea PointsFuture accommodation will require some sort <strong>of</strong> catering provisions; this is entirelydependent upon <strong>the</strong> size and nature <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> proposed accommodation.2.6.9 Laboratory, Workshops and Teaching KitchensThese spaces are faculty specific and need individual response. It should be noted that<strong>the</strong>se facilities need determining early as <strong>the</strong>y may have structural, mechanical andelectrical implications above “normal” space usage.2.6.10 Sports Facilities2.6.11 ToiletsUWE prides itself on sporting facilities <strong>of</strong>fered. Any future design proposal that relates tosporting facilities will require <strong>the</strong> design team to adopt <strong>the</strong> universities excellent standardsand incorporate readily accepted industry standards.Toilet provision will be designed to be sufficient <strong>for</strong> building occupancy levels and becompliant with <strong>the</strong> current Equalities Act and o<strong>the</strong>r relevant standard/regulation, bestpractice etc.Cubicle dimensions shall allow <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> increasing sizes <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> human frame.Water use and heating saving is important. Non-touch flush and hand-wash controls arerequired.It is preferred that toilets have concealed services and cisterns. In this respect centralservice spaces are to be designed which will allow maintenance and repair <strong>of</strong> serviceswithout <strong>the</strong> need to close part or all <strong>of</strong> a toiletPart 2 | S pace Standards7 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>2.7 Space ReferencingUWE has a fixed method <strong>of</strong> room referencing and this is to be adopted <strong>for</strong> any futurescheme design. An overview <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Universities protocols is detailed below-The room number commences with a reference to <strong>the</strong> campus level, <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> buildingletter, <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> room number e.g. 2E36The level number <strong>of</strong> each floor is determined by <strong>the</strong> site level so at <strong>the</strong> upper end <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>site <strong>the</strong> initial entrance may be on level 2All spaces receive a number including lift shafts, ducts and risers. For Staircases andCorridors add <strong>the</strong> letter S or C respectively e.g. 2EC26 <strong>for</strong> lifts add L.Please refer to Section 3 <strong>for</strong> fur<strong>the</strong>r Guidance <strong>for</strong> Cataloguing Rooms.2.8 Fire Door ReferencingAll fire doors within <strong>the</strong> estate will require periodic checks as stated and in accordancewith BS8214 code <strong>of</strong> practice <strong>for</strong> Fire Door Assemblies with non metallic leafs. To aid <strong>the</strong>survey and periodic check <strong>the</strong>re should be a separate electronic and paper drawingproduced which shows all fire doors and space references only.The fire door referencing to be used should have <strong>the</strong> prefix FD followed by buildingreference, floor level, door number.E.g. FD/2E34 denotes fire door located level 2 in E Block room no 34Part 2 | S pace Standards8 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>UWE Facilities<strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Appendix 2/1Room Data SheetPart 2 | S pace Standards9 | P age


FacilitiesRoom Data SheetProject RefRoom NumberNo. <strong>of</strong> PersonsRoom UsageGENERALProject NameSheet <strong>of</strong> RevisionRoom NameRoom TypeTime <strong>of</strong> Use hours per day days per week weeks per yearRoom Dimensions m 2 floor area m susp. ceiling m struct. s<strong>of</strong>fit m clear heightSecurityElectronic(E.g. Swipe access)Mechanical (E.g. Deadlock with cylinder type & code)PhysicalSpecial Req.s(E.g. Door)FINISHESWall Finish (E.g. 'Plaster skim to plasterboard or blockwork)Decoration(E.g. 'Diamond Matt Emulsion - White')Floor Finish (E.g. 'Screed on Concrete)Covering(E.g. 'Altro <strong>Design</strong>er 25 Safety Flooring - Twilight')Skirting Material (E.g. 'S<strong>of</strong>twood or MDF - gloss painted white')Sit In/PlantedSit In / PlantedCeiling Type (E.g. 'Suspended Grid - White')DoorsCeiling TilesJoinery / TrimsWindowsInternal ScreensO<strong>the</strong>rDesk(s)Table(s)S<strong>of</strong>fit(E.g. "Veneer Finish")FIXTURES & FITTINGSItem No. Type FinishPerimeter BenchingChairs/SeatingCupboardsFiling CabinetsShelvingPin/Notice Board(s)Projection Screen(s)Whiteboard(s)BlindsSignageToprailCoat-hooksSundry itemsWaste/ Recycle BinsO<strong>the</strong>r(e.g. Movable or Fixed)(e.g. Fixed or Hanging)(e.g. Clock)Part 2 | S pace Standards10 | P age


To O<strong>the</strong>r RoomsTo External WallsTo Ground/Ro<strong>of</strong>KEY RELATIONSHIPSACOUSTIC PERFORMANCESound Insulationbetween RoomsMin Value <strong>of</strong> Dnt (Tmfmax),w dbSound reduction btwn room and circulation spaces Min Value dbDoor within above partition, rated as a complete door set Min Value dbReverberationTimeMin ValuesNoise fromBuilding ServicesMin ValueNro CENVIRONMENTALRoom Temperature SummerWinterRoom Humidity Summer % RH Winter % RHFiltration Level Supply G/F Extract G/FMechanical Ventilation Rate l/p/s ACH Noise Rating NR/DBRelative Pressure Positive Negative %GasesVentilationNaturalGasO<strong>the</strong>rSpecify:MECHANICALHVAC Terminal Fan Coil Units Underfloor HeatingUnits Radiators Natural ConvectorsFan ConvectorsSplit DX UnitsElectric Panel/StorageHeatersVRV UnitsUnit HeatersCAV BoxesRadiant HeatersVAV BoxesO<strong>the</strong>rSpecify:o CSpecialist ControlReq.sItemWash Hand BasinSinkWCUrinalShowerDrinking FountainVending MachineDishwasherWashing MachineCleaner's SinkFume CupboardO<strong>the</strong>r (Specify)No.O<strong>the</strong>r (Specify)Specialist Water / Draining Req.sMains Cold WaterFedHOT & COLD WATER & DRAINAGEDomestic ColdWater FedDomestic Hot WaterFedConventional / ChemicalDrainageFire Protection Sprinklers Class/HazardInert GasSpecialist ExtractO<strong>the</strong>rSpecify:Part 2 | S pace Standards11 | P age


ELECTRICALLightingAverage lighting level lux Working Plane Height mUni<strong>for</strong>mityGlare indexVDU usage - yes/noLocal task lighting required - yes/noSee Luminaireschedule <strong>for</strong>luminaire selectionand lamp typeLighting Controls Local Manual Dimmable PIR Daylight LinkedTimeclock Photocell BEMS Scene SettingO<strong>the</strong>r Special Req.sEmergency lighting Non-Maintained Maintained SustainedCentral Battery Self-testSmall Power 24V DC 110V DC 400V 3 PhaseStandard Dual Earth Clean EarthSkirting Dado CeilingDesk/Worktop Floor Box No. Outlet / m 2Wiring TypeContainment TypeEmergency Power Lighting PC Power HVAC UPSFume Cupboard IT Comms O<strong>the</strong>r Power GeneratorTV/FM/RadioOutletsData/PhoneOutletsWall Dado Ceiling Floor BoxDesk/Worktop No. Outlet / m 2Wall Dado Ceiling Floor BoxDesk/Worktop No. Outlet / m 2Access Control Card - Chip Card - Swipe Keyfob KeypadIntruder Alarm PIR Window Break Door Contact PerimeterPanic Alarm Fixed RemoteCCTV Fixed ELECTRICALPan/Tilt/ZoomFire Detection Smoke Heat Manual Call Xenon BeaconCeiling levelSprinklersRemote IndicatorVoidsO<strong>the</strong>r - SpecifyDoor Hold Open DeviceDDA Disabled Persons Alarm Induction Loop Public AddressIT & AV EQUIPMENTItem No. New? M&E Services RequirementsData ProjectorO/head ProjectorSlide ProjectorTV & VideoAudio VisualO<strong>the</strong>r(E.g. '230v switched power supply and 1 no. RJ45 data outlet')Part 2 | S pace Standards12 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Appendix 2/2Area Definitions• Five definitions <strong>of</strong> floor area are used in construction projects in HEIs.• The following guidance has been derived from <strong>the</strong> ‘RICS Code <strong>of</strong> MeasuringPractice: A <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> Surveyors and Valuers’ 5th edition, and <strong>the</strong> EstatesManagement Statistics Data Definitions.GEA – Gross External Area (<strong>for</strong> planning applications)• The area <strong>of</strong> a building measured externally at each floor level -• Including all spaces within <strong>the</strong> building, and perimeter wall thicknesses, externalprojections, loading bays and garages.• Excluding open-sided balconies, fire escapes, canopies, and ro<strong>of</strong> terraces.GIA – Gross Internal Area (<strong>for</strong> building costs estimation)• The area <strong>of</strong> a building measured to <strong>the</strong> internal face <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> perimeter walls at eachfloor level -• Including all spaces within <strong>the</strong> building, internal structure, walls and partitions,loading bays and garages.• Excluding perimeter wall thicknesses and external projections, external balconiesand voids over atria.NIA – Net Internal Area (equivalent <strong>of</strong> net letable area)• The area within a building that comprises usable areas and primary horizontalcirculation - Including all usable spaces, kitchens and built-in units and cupboardsthat occupy usable areas, and horizontal circulation.• Excluding common entrance halls, atria, landings and balconies; toilets, toiletlobbies, bathrooms and cleaners’ rooms; plant spaces (lift rooms, plant rooms, risers,duct rooms, tank rooms and fuel stores); vertical circulation (stairwells, lift-wells andassociated lobbies); internal structure (structural walls, columns, piers etc); andloading bays and garages.NUA – Net Usable Area (area available in rooms <strong>for</strong> people to use)• The area within a building available <strong>for</strong> people to use -• Excluding primary horizontal circulation (major horizontal routes that link fireescapes) in addition to all <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> above.Balance Area (areas to enable <strong>the</strong> building to function)• The floor area planned to enable <strong>the</strong> building to function -• Including stairwells; entrance lobbies; atria and foyers where <strong>the</strong> function is solely orprimarily <strong>for</strong> circulation; lifts and lift lobbies; lavatories and toilet lobbies; cloakrooms;cleaners’ stores and cupboards; plant rooms, tank rooms, boiler houses, calorifierchambers and fuel stores; loading bays and ducts, that o<strong>the</strong>rwise are included withgross internal area. It includes primary horizontal circulation, fire corridors and smokelobbies that o<strong>the</strong>rwise are included within net internal area.• Excluding everything that is net usable area.Part 2 | S pace Standards13 | P age


This page is intentionally blank


UWE Facilities<strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>N BlockPart 3General <strong>Design</strong>


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>IndexPart 1Part 2Part 3IntroductionSpace StandardsGeneral <strong>Design</strong>3.1 Policies and Practices <strong>for</strong> Good <strong>Design</strong>3.1.1 Environmental, Social and Economic Impact3.1.2 Impact3.1.3 Build Quality3.1.4 <strong>Design</strong> and Functionality3.1.5 Asbestos3.2 Compliance with Standards3.2.1 Building Regulations, British Standards, Codes <strong>of</strong> Practice & O<strong>the</strong>r Legislation3.3 Technical Criteria3.3.1 <strong>Design</strong> Grid3.3.2 Occupancy3.4 Equality and Diversity3.4.1 Disability Equality Scheme.3.4.2 Equality Impact Assessment3.4.3 Disability Discrimination Act3.5 Access <strong>for</strong> Maintenance3.6 Sustainability3.7 Waste Handling & Storage3.8 Acoustic <strong>Design</strong>3.9 Fire Strategy3.9.1 <strong>Design</strong>ing to Prevent Fires3.9.2 Constructing Near Gas Installations3.9.3 Fire <strong>Design</strong> Strategy <strong>for</strong> Persons with Disabilities3.10 UWE Health & Safety Unit3.11 Transport Strategy3.12 Drawing Standards3.13 Guidance <strong>for</strong> Cataloguing RoomsPart 4Part 5Part 6BC&E RequirementsM & E RequirementsSpecialist InstallationsIndex


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>3.1 UWE Policies and Practices <strong>for</strong> Good <strong>Design</strong>The <strong>University</strong> expects good quality design and will benchmark all projects to ensure thatbuildings commissioned by <strong>the</strong>m will meet <strong>the</strong>ir expected standards.The good design principles will Rationalise stock/reduce costs/corporate branding3.1.1 Environmental, Social and Economic Impact3.1.2 ImpactThe environmental, social and economic impact <strong>of</strong> a project will be assessed at <strong>the</strong> designstage and reviewed throughout <strong>the</strong> buildings lifecycle. The project team will be expected toreduce <strong>the</strong> impact <strong>of</strong> any proposed project by looking at all three impact areas and givingeach area equal weighting when making decisions.<strong>Design</strong>ers will be expected to refer to post occupancy evaluations from previous designs<strong>the</strong>y where/are involved in to ensure in<strong>for</strong>med decisions are taken and principles adoptedby <strong>the</strong> project team. For example, designers should refer to monitoring <strong>of</strong> energyper<strong>for</strong>mance from specific projects to provide guidance on how Part L building regulationscan be exceeded or achieved effectively.The project team and contractors will be expected to exceed legislation, work with andadopt <strong>the</strong> same standards as UWE. Where legislation, standards or best practice do notexist <strong>the</strong> project team will be expected to develop and implement <strong>the</strong>ir own standards.All projects must be in line with <strong>the</strong> UWE Sustainability Strategy and Environmental Policyas found on <strong>the</strong> UWE web pages.The designers must ensure that any projects physical impact on <strong>the</strong> surrounding area, localcommunities and environment is in keeping and must satisfy <strong>the</strong> Local Authoritiesrequirements.<strong>Design</strong>ers must ensure that a relative scale to any proposed development is maintainedthrough well proportioned routes and spaces. Hard and s<strong>of</strong>t landscaping should be used toensure that buildings compliment <strong>the</strong>ir surroundings and a sense <strong>of</strong> scale through s<strong>of</strong>tening<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> outline <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building is achieved. At <strong>the</strong> edges <strong>of</strong> any development <strong>the</strong> design teamshould ensure that a strong, open, accessible and active interface is achieved with <strong>the</strong>surrounding areas on all elevations.<strong>Design</strong>ers are encouraged to create buildings and spaces that produce visual impact, toinspire users. Internal design and fit out to maximize student experience. Not iconicfacades.3.1.3 Build QualityUWE expects <strong>the</strong> whole design and construction process to be <strong>of</strong> high quality. This covers<strong>the</strong> whole per<strong>for</strong>mance <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> project and includes structural stability, robustness <strong>of</strong>systems, safety and durability <strong>of</strong> fixtures and fittings whilst considering value <strong>for</strong> money3.1.4 <strong>Design</strong> and Functionality.The interaction <strong>of</strong> spaces, <strong>the</strong>ir flexibility, accessibility and <strong>the</strong> quality <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> whole will beassessed.Part 3 | G eneral design1 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>The <strong>University</strong> will be undertaking audits <strong>of</strong> quality, safety, environmental and sustainabilityimpact on a regular basis <strong>of</strong> all its projects. <strong>Design</strong>ers and contractors will be required toprovide energy, waste and water in<strong>for</strong>mation as part <strong>of</strong> project progress meetings and tobenchmark consumption against similar sized projects.3.1.5 AsbestosAlthough UWE Facilities holds an asbestos register, a refurbishment and demolitionasbestos survey must be per<strong>for</strong>med by <strong>the</strong> UWE asbestos consultants as soon aspracticable after project inception, and <strong>the</strong> survey must cover <strong>the</strong> entire project area,including items/spaces adjacent to work areas where disturbance from, say ,data/M&Eservice installations could be expected. This survey should be completed and reviewedprior to completion <strong>of</strong> detailed design as <strong>the</strong> findings could affect design decisions,programme and costs. Where necessary, <strong>the</strong> project should make provision <strong>for</strong> on-sitetesting facilities in order to facilitate <strong>the</strong> efficient processing <strong>of</strong> samples3.2 Compliance with Standards3.2.1 Building Regulations, British Standards, Codes <strong>of</strong> Practice & Best PracticeLegislationProjects will be, as a minimum, designed and constructed in compliance with but not limitedto <strong>the</strong> following:• All relevant Acts <strong>of</strong> Parliament, Statutory Instruments and Mandatory <strong>Guide</strong>lines• The requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Building Regulations• British Standards, Specifications and Codes <strong>of</strong> Practice• The requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Local Authority• The requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> utility supply companies• Health and Safety Regulations including <strong>the</strong> CDM regulations and <strong>the</strong> Workplace(Health, Safety and Welfare) Regulation.• Environmental Protection Act 1990• Standard UWE B&CE and M&E Specifications• BRE Green <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> Specification• <strong>Design</strong>ed to assist UWE meet our Halving Waste to Landfill commitment• WRAP’s reuse <strong>of</strong> recycled material (See 3.6.10)• BREEAM Very Good rating or equivalent <strong>for</strong> ano<strong>the</strong>r relevant standard• The LPC <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> Fire Protection <strong>of</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong> 2000All as current at <strong>the</strong> time <strong>of</strong> appointment and fur<strong>the</strong>r revisions prior to final design sign <strong>of</strong>fbeing achieved.3.3 Technical Criteria3.3.1 <strong>Design</strong> GridThe <strong>University</strong> wishes its buildings to be flexible, with spaces being designed to be as openas possible. It <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e encourages a large grid and as large as possible finished floor t<strong>of</strong>inished ceiling height commensurate with a reasonable cost. The void created by asuspended ceiling should be 600mm minimum deep under flat structural s<strong>of</strong>fits in order toaccommodate services. Any raised floor should be a minimum distance <strong>of</strong> 250mm fromfloor finish to structural floor.3.3.2 OccupancySee Section 2 – Space StandardsPart 3 | G eneral design2 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>3.4 Equality and Diversity3.4.1 Disability Equality Scheme.The <strong>University</strong> has commissioned GEM, an independent local Equalities and HumanRights consultancy firm to assist <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong> in revising its current Disability EqualityScheme. This report is available on <strong>the</strong> UWE equalities Unit website and will become areference document <strong>for</strong> this guide.3.4.2 Equality Impact AssessmentEach project shall have an Equality Impact Assessment which follows <strong>the</strong> UWE standard<strong>for</strong>mat. This document should show pro<strong>of</strong> that <strong>the</strong> UWE equality groups have beenconsulted. Initially write a short report describing <strong>the</strong> proposals can be <strong>for</strong>warded to <strong>the</strong>segroups via <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong> Equality and Diversity Unit. As <strong>the</strong> project develops <strong>the</strong>re will be aneed to ensure this line <strong>of</strong> communication is maintained.3.4.3 Disability Discrimination Act/ Equality ActIn 2004 UWE instigated a series <strong>of</strong> access audits to most sites and buildings and fundswere made available to ensure that areas and buildings were made compliant with <strong>the</strong> Act.Since <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> portfolio <strong>of</strong> buildings has changed and changes in <strong>the</strong> Act, including itsintegration into <strong>the</strong> Equality Act 2010, led to new audits to cover those not included in <strong>the</strong>original work and a reassessment <strong>of</strong> those which had.A second batch <strong>of</strong> works based on a three year programme started in 2009 and is plannedto continue into 2012.The emphasis <strong>of</strong> all this work has been to move towards best practice and to “design <strong>for</strong>all”, not just to be compliant with <strong>the</strong>:• Disability Discrimination Act (1995),• Equality Act (2010)• BS8300 : 2009 <strong>Design</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong> and <strong>the</strong>ir Approaches to Meet <strong>the</strong> Needs <strong>of</strong>Disabled People – Code <strong>of</strong> PracticeThe main point being that by inclusive design <strong>the</strong>re is no need <strong>for</strong> specialist design. Forexample if a building is designed with level access and good simple access, <strong>the</strong>n it is better<strong>for</strong> all users.The <strong>University</strong> Policy <strong>of</strong> “Access to All” may sometimes lead to conflict with <strong>the</strong> need <strong>for</strong>specialist facilities <strong>for</strong> specific groups or persons, and this guide cannot cover all <strong>the</strong>exceptional cases or eventualities. The basic principle is to ensure all groups have beenconsulted to find <strong>the</strong> practical solution in designing to best practice and with flexibility <strong>for</strong>future changes <strong>for</strong> those special cases e.g. ensuring enough space is included inaccessible toilets <strong>for</strong> a hoist.As well as adopting a pragmatic approach <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> DDA provisions based on <strong>the</strong> above, <strong>the</strong>design team should also consider financial reasonableness.3.5 Access <strong>for</strong> MaintenanceAccess to plant and technical areas should be accessed internally or externally viacirculation areas. Access through areas <strong>of</strong> activity should be avoided. Sufficient spaceshould be allowed around plant to allow <strong>for</strong> maintenance, removal and replacement asPart 3 | G eneral design3 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>required <strong>for</strong> all maintenance operations. See also Part 5 M&E Requirements Item 1.2.Safe access arrangements will need to be provided <strong>for</strong> all maintenance tasks.3.6 SustainabilityUWE’s vision is to embed sustainability throughout everything we do, from <strong>the</strong> courses weteach to <strong>the</strong> services <strong>of</strong>fered to our students. Our Estate is no exception to this rule, andsustainability should be a strong <strong>the</strong>me throughout any new development.As detailed in 3.1.1, UWE’s Sustainability Strategy and Environmental Policy (available onUWE web pages) sets out some overarching guidelines. Aspects <strong>of</strong> sustainability will bediscussed throughout this guide where relevant. The following section details somespecific areas UWE would like to be considered as part <strong>of</strong> any new development to ensuresustainability is considered from <strong>the</strong> early stages <strong>of</strong> design.3.6.1 BREEAMThe <strong>University</strong> requires all major refurbishments and new builds to aim <strong>for</strong> a BREEAM VeryGood (2011) rating. When specifying a new project, <strong>the</strong> a higher BREEAM rating shouldalso be considered. This standard will ensure buildings are designed to environmentalstandards beyond regulation.3.6.2 Energy Use and Carbon EmissionsThe <strong>University</strong>’s Energy Management Policy and Strategy, both available on <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong>website, detail <strong>the</strong> key principals and responsibilities <strong>for</strong> energy management at <strong>the</strong><strong>University</strong>.In 2010 a carbon emissions inventory was completed <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong> covering buildingsemissions, water use, waste, staff and student business travel and commuting. Based onfigures <strong>for</strong> 2008/9 UWE’s total carbon emissions totalled 34,500 tones CO 2 . Energy usedin <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong>’s academic and residential buildings accounts <strong>for</strong> approximately half <strong>of</strong><strong>the</strong>se emissions, and costs <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong> around £3million per annum.The <strong>University</strong> has made a commitment to reduce its energy use and carbon emissions. Ithas set out <strong>the</strong> following targets <strong>for</strong> carbon reduction associated with energy use in<strong>University</strong> buildings:• Absolute reduction from 2005/6 – 2020/21: 1.5% annual reduction Equating to22.5% total reduction• Relative reduction from 2001/2 - 2020/21: 50% relative reduction (based on kgCO2per m2 and average wea<strong>the</strong>r) – this has been extended from <strong>the</strong> original target <strong>of</strong> 30%reduction from 2001/2 – 2011/12.These targets are challenging but achievable as UWE is dedicated to meeting <strong>the</strong>m.The <strong>University</strong>’s Higher Education Carbon Management Plan (CMP) details projectsrequired to meet <strong>the</strong>se targets and is available on <strong>the</strong> UWE website. As well as <strong>the</strong>projects detailed in <strong>the</strong> CMP all new buildings and major refurbishment should considerenergy efficiency improvements to both building fabric and building systems. Thesespecific requirements will be detailed in <strong>the</strong> building, mechanical and electricalrequirements, Parts 4 - 6.Target carbon dioxide emissions rate should always exceed those set out in buildingregulations approved document L2A, Conservation <strong>of</strong> fuel and Power.Part 3 | G eneral design4 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>3.6.3 MeteringAs well as <strong>the</strong> BREEAM requirements, CIBSE guide TM39 (Building energy metering)should be followed <strong>for</strong> metering strategies <strong>for</strong> new building and major refurbishments.The <strong>University</strong> requires that all new meters should have a pulsed output that is connectedto <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong> Energy Team’s Elcomponent metering system. All necessary equipmentrequired to ensure that each metering unit can be connected onto <strong>the</strong> Elcomponent system,including data points, power supplies, pulse loggers etc shall be provided as part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>project. Allowance shall be made <strong>for</strong> modifying and/or extending <strong>the</strong> existing datacollection system as required ensuring that it is sufficiently sized to accommodate <strong>the</strong>additional metering units within <strong>the</strong> building.Specific details <strong>for</strong> electrical and mechanical metering arrangements will be addressed inPart 5 and Part 6.3.6.4 Energy Per<strong>for</strong>mance <strong>of</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong> Directive 2002/91/ECAs required by <strong>the</strong> above directive, once any new building is physically complete, <strong>the</strong><strong>University</strong> should be supplied with an Energy Per<strong>for</strong>mance Certificate (EPC) and arecommendation report. It is <strong>the</strong> responsibility <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> person carrying out <strong>the</strong> constructionto supply <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong> with this. At design stage a target EPC rating should be set throughliaison with <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong>. The minimum EPC target rating will be B.As specified by <strong>the</strong> legislation, an Energy Per<strong>for</strong>mance Certificate (EPC) is also required <strong>for</strong>refurbishments if a building is modified to have more or fewer parts than it originally had and<strong>the</strong> modification includes <strong>the</strong> provision or extension <strong>of</strong> fixed services <strong>for</strong> heating, airconditioning or mechanical ventilation (i.e. those services that condition <strong>the</strong> indoor climate<strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> benefits <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> occupants). Referenced from ‘A <strong>Guide</strong> to energy per<strong>for</strong>mancecertificates <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> construction, sale and let <strong>of</strong> non-dwellings’ 2 nd edition July 2008,Communities and Local Government.3.6.5 Renewable and Low Carbon EnergyWhen considering major refurbishment and new builds, renewable energy sources shouldalways be considered prior to specifying standard fossil fuels or grid generated electricity.To achieve <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong>’s carbon reduction targets <strong>the</strong> onsite generation <strong>of</strong> energy isrequired and <strong>the</strong> following should be investigated at all opportunities:• Solar <strong>the</strong>rmal• Solar PV• Wind• Biomass/Bi<strong>of</strong>uel• CHP• Air source/ground source heat pumps3.6.6 Water EfficiencyUWE has a standard spec <strong>for</strong> WC refurbishments to aid water efficiency including WCs,taps, urinals etc.3.6.7 Rain Water and Grey WaterThe use <strong>of</strong> rain water and grey water harvesting should always be investigated <strong>for</strong> majorrefurbishments and new builds. Where possible a gravity fed system should be specified.For refurbishments, if <strong>the</strong> retr<strong>of</strong>itting <strong>of</strong> an internal system is un-viable, <strong>the</strong> collection <strong>of</strong> rainwater should be considered <strong>for</strong> grounds watering purposes.Part 3 | G eneral design5 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>3.6.8 Timber3.6.9 Steel3.6.10 PVClThe <strong>University</strong> recognise <strong>the</strong> importance <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> choices we make in buying products and<strong>the</strong> impacts on environmental and social aspects throughout <strong>the</strong> world. Consequently it isUWE’s policy to purchase only legal and sustainable or recycled timber and timberproducts in accordance with <strong>the</strong> advice given in The Environmental Association <strong>for</strong>Universities and Colleges (EAUC http://www.eauc.org.uk/commodity_in<strong>for</strong>mation_sheets)– Timber Commodity In<strong>for</strong>mation Sheet.UWE has adopted <strong>the</strong> UK Government Timber Procurement Policy as below:This policy requires that all timber and wood derived products procured originate from:• Legal and sustainable sources (i.e. FSC), or• FLEGT licensed or equivalent sourcesRecycled products are equally accepted (where appropriate and agreed)The <strong>University</strong> recognise <strong>the</strong> importance <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> choices we make in buying products and<strong>the</strong> impacts on environmental and social aspects throughout <strong>the</strong> world. Consequently it isUWE’s policy to adopt <strong>the</strong> principles and guidance <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> procurement <strong>of</strong> steel as given by<strong>the</strong> Environmental Association <strong>for</strong> Universities and Colleges (eauc) sheet.http://www.uwe.ac.uk/facilities/estates/in<strong>for</strong>mation/in<strong>for</strong>mationindex.shtmlEAUC Recommendations:Use suppliers that can demonstrate a commitment to <strong>the</strong> following throughout <strong>the</strong>ir supplychain:• Supply products with a high percentage <strong>of</strong> recycled steel• Supply from companies which are signatories <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> EITI• Supply from companies which are signatories <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Voluntary Principles on Securityand Human Rights and UN Norms• Actively engagement <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> supply chain in minimizing social and environmentalissues.The <strong>University</strong> recognise <strong>the</strong> importance <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> choices we make in buying products and<strong>the</strong> impacts on environmental and social aspects throughout <strong>the</strong> world. Consequently it isUWE’s policy to consider <strong>the</strong> principles and guidance <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> procurement <strong>of</strong> Plastics asgiven by <strong>the</strong> Environmental Association <strong>for</strong> Universities and Colleges (eauc) sheethttp://www.uwe.ac.uk/facilities/estates/in<strong>for</strong>mation/in<strong>for</strong>mationindex.shtml3.6.11 Construction Waste ManagementUWE seeks to reduce <strong>the</strong> amount <strong>of</strong> waste produced as a direct result <strong>of</strong> its constructionrelated activities. As a result <strong>the</strong> design team must ensure:• That all waste is-‘designed out’ from <strong>the</strong> concept stage onwards• The design meets UWE’s WRAP commitment to <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> recycled content.Part 3 | G eneral design6 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>• That <strong>the</strong> design minimizes waste on site in order <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> Contractor’s to meet UWE’scommitment to Halving Waste from Construction.Contractors must- provide full details on how Hazardous Waste will be dealt with <strong>for</strong>refurbishment and demolition work prior to starting on site.Where reasonably practicable <strong>the</strong> design team and contractor must ensure that nohazardous substances are included in <strong>the</strong> design and build <strong>of</strong> a capital project.Site Waste Management Plans to be developed in accordance with statutory requirements.3.6.12 Materials SelectionUWE has made a commitment to maximise recycled content in <strong>the</strong> construction process. Innew building UWE sets a target <strong>of</strong> 20% by cost. In refurbishment <strong>the</strong> same ethos isenvisaged although it is understood that this is more challenging so a target is set at 15%As a result <strong>the</strong> design team and main contractor will be expected to use <strong>the</strong> following toensure <strong>the</strong> most environmentally sound materials are used in a project:• WRAPs Materials Resource Efficiency Toolkit, and that a minimum <strong>of</strong> ‘good practice’ isachieved.• The Green <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> Specification.Recyclability at end <strong>of</strong> building life must also be considered, ensuring materials selectedare easily recyclable upon demolition.3.6.13 Whole Life CostingAs detailed in section 1.6 Economic Evaluation <strong>of</strong> Building Projects, whole life costingmethods will be applied to all projects to ensure that <strong>the</strong> best option is selected <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong>lifetime <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building not simply <strong>the</strong> lowest capital expenditure. This whole life costingshould include an evaluation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> utility and carbon costs <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> life <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building.3.6.14 FlexibilityThe future <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> higher education market in <strong>the</strong> UK is uncertain. It is possible that studentsmay not attend lectures in <strong>the</strong> future or that lecture rooms will be replaced with ano<strong>the</strong>r <strong>for</strong>m<strong>of</strong> teaching environment. Future buildings should be designed to incorporate flexibility sothat areas can be altered easily, as far as practically achievable.3.6.15 Funding OpportunitiesThe <strong>University</strong> is part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Salix funding scheme which provides financial support toprojects that have related energy savings. If certain projects require additional funding toenable <strong>the</strong> most energy efficient option to be installed, <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> Energy Team within Estatesshould be contacted to discuss <strong>the</strong> opportunities.Alternative funding from sponsors, Government initiatives, etc should be reviewed at StageB <strong>of</strong> project developments.3.7 Waste Handling & StorageAs an overarching principle <strong>the</strong> design team should follow <strong>the</strong> guidance given as required<strong>for</strong> a BREEAM assessment, <strong>the</strong> space given with such an assessment is in directproportion to <strong>the</strong> square meterage <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building.Part 3 | G eneral design7 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>The design team should note that UWE have a priority on recycling. Hence, <strong>the</strong> widerdesign should include space <strong>for</strong> bins & recycling points across all areas <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building i.e.<strong>of</strong>fices, kitchens, eating areas, study areas etc. The design team will additionally need toconsider ease <strong>of</strong> access <strong>for</strong> cleaners, both storage <strong>of</strong> materials and access whilstundertaking <strong>the</strong> cleaning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> buildings.Any bin stores provided should have enough space <strong>for</strong>1100 litre recycling and generalwaste bins to be moved in and out <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building and have good access/space/head height<strong>for</strong> cleaners to empty smaller bins into <strong>the</strong>m.Any design should include <strong>the</strong> facilities to store hazardous waste. This will range fromfridges, to chemicals/contaminated cleaning containers, to fluorescent tubes, TV's throughto chemicals storage requirements. The design team must ensure adequate Health &Safety precautions are in place including eye washes etc.Hazardous waste storage and collection is not included in BREEAM calculations, <strong>the</strong> exactrequirements will depend on overall size/use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building. In specific situationsdepending upon <strong>the</strong> faculty in question <strong>the</strong>re may be a need to provide external space toaccommodate lockable skips.3.8 Acoustic <strong>Design</strong>3.8.1 IntroductionThis section deals with acoustic standards within new and re-furbished UWE buildings. Theoverarching objective is to provide acoustic conditions within each room which arecompatible with its intended purpose.The acoustic requirements are dealt with under <strong>the</strong> following headings;• Sound insulation between rooms• Noise entering <strong>the</strong> building from outside• Room acoustics• Noise from building services• Acoustic <strong>Design</strong> <strong>of</strong> Residential AccommodationMany <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> standards are derived from those contained in <strong>the</strong> DfES publication BB93Acoustic <strong>Design</strong> <strong>of</strong> School. The standards described in that publication are, under <strong>the</strong>Building Regulations, mandatory <strong>for</strong> new and refurbished school buildings. For universities<strong>the</strong>y are not mandatory. While <strong>the</strong>y <strong>for</strong>m a useful starting point, some spaces within auniversity fall outside <strong>the</strong> requirements <strong>of</strong> most schools, and in some cases higher acousticstandards may be justified even when rooms are being put to similar uses.3.8.2 Sound Insulation between Rooms - Airborne Sound between RoomsThe table below lists various types <strong>of</strong> room according to <strong>the</strong>ir function, along with <strong>the</strong>required level <strong>of</strong> airborne sound insulation.Where a wall separates two rooms with different functions, <strong>the</strong> standard <strong>of</strong> sound insulationto be applied will be <strong>the</strong> higher <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> two.The quantity used to specify sound insulation here is DnT(Tmfmax),w as defined in BB93.This is <strong>the</strong> standardized level difference between <strong>the</strong> two rooms, measured according to<strong>the</strong> requirements <strong>of</strong> ISO 140 part 4 and standardised to <strong>the</strong> highest recommended midfrequency reverberation time in ei<strong>the</strong>r <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> two rooms. It is <strong>the</strong>n frequency weighted asPart 3 | G eneral design8 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>described in ISO 717 part 2. It is not <strong>the</strong> same as <strong>the</strong> weighted sound reduction index,abbreviated to Rw and commonly used by suppliers <strong>of</strong> building materials to characterise<strong>the</strong>ir products.Type(s) <strong>of</strong> RoomAcademic staff and admin <strong>of</strong>fices, meeting roomsCafeterias, c<strong>of</strong>fee bars etc.Class rooms, lecture rooms, seminar rooms and tutorial rooms.Audio Visual and video conference rooms and language laboratoriesDrama studios, music practice rooms.Halls and rooms <strong>for</strong> music drama and o<strong>the</strong>r live per<strong>for</strong>mancesLarge lecture <strong>the</strong>atres and flagship conference roomsLecture <strong>the</strong>atres up to 100 seatsLibrary circulation and media storage areasLibrary study areasRecording studiosRooms intended <strong>for</strong> clinical examination and treatment,Confidential interviews, psycho<strong>the</strong>rapy, speech <strong>the</strong>rapy etc.Science laboratories, art and design studios, graphicsworkshopsSports halls and gymnasiaSwimming poolsWorkshopsMin Value <strong>of</strong>DnT(Tmfmax),w45dB45dB45dB55dB55dB50dB45dB40dB45dB60dB*50dB*40dB50dB45dB45dB** Denotes that requirements can vary considerably and specialist design input may berequired.3.8.3 Airborne Sound Insulation between Rooms and Circulation SpacesIt is difficult to measure sound insulation values between a room and an odd shaped spacesuch as a corridor. As a result it is normal to specify minimum values <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> weighted soundreduction index Rw required <strong>of</strong> partition systems and doors separating a room from acirculation space. Two levels <strong>of</strong> sound insulation are specified here <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong>se situations.StructurePartition separating a teaching space or <strong>of</strong>fice from a circulation areaDoor within <strong>the</strong> above partition, rated as a complete door setPartition separating a teaching space <strong>for</strong> specialised purposes (suchas music or drama) from a circulation areaDoor within <strong>the</strong> above partition, rated as a complete door setMinimumvalue <strong>of</strong> Rw40dB30dB45dB35dBSpecialist acoustic design input will be required if a teaching room or o<strong>the</strong>r noise sensitiveroom opens into a busy atrium or through corridor, or in <strong>the</strong> case <strong>of</strong> large lecture <strong>the</strong>atresand conference rooms with a waiting/ social area immediately outside <strong>the</strong>ir doors.Part 3 | G eneral design9 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>3.8.4 Impact and Air Borne Sound Insulation <strong>of</strong> FloorsImpact sound insulation deals with <strong>the</strong> transmission <strong>of</strong> noise to <strong>the</strong> rooms below from noisesources in contact with <strong>the</strong> floor. Typical noise sources include footsteps, moving furnitureand machinery. Because <strong>the</strong> internal layout <strong>of</strong> a building may be changed many timesduring its lifetime, a single set <strong>of</strong> standards is applied here <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> airborne and impactsound insulation <strong>of</strong> floors. In <strong>the</strong> case <strong>of</strong> airborne sound insulation, <strong>the</strong> quantity specified is,as be<strong>for</strong>e, DnT(Tmfmax),w. For impact sound insulation <strong>the</strong> quantity specified is L'nT,w, asdefined in ISO 140 part 7 and ISO 717 part 2.Minimum value <strong>of</strong> DnT(Tmfmax),wMaximum value <strong>of</strong> L'nT,w3.8.5 Noise from Outside55 dB55 dBThe maximum sound pressure levels due to external noise intrusion are listed in <strong>the</strong> tablebelow. These values include noise contributions from transport – including road and railtraffic and civil aviation – from <strong>the</strong> wea<strong>the</strong>r, and from industrial and human activity both onand <strong>of</strong>f <strong>University</strong>’s premises. Building and civil engineering work are not included since<strong>the</strong>y are temporary in nature. The values listed should be considered in conjunction with <strong>the</strong>specification <strong>for</strong> building services noise which appears later. Control <strong>of</strong> external noiseinvolves consideration <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> ambient noise levels at <strong>the</strong> specific site involved, <strong>the</strong> soundinsulation properties <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building shell (including <strong>the</strong> ro<strong>of</strong> structure in <strong>the</strong> case <strong>of</strong> aircraftnoise) and <strong>the</strong> impact on sound insulation <strong>of</strong> any ventilation requirements such as <strong>the</strong> need<strong>for</strong> opening windows.Type(s) <strong>of</strong> roomAcademic staff and admin <strong>of</strong>ficesCafeterias, c<strong>of</strong>fee bars etc.Class rooms, lecture rooms, seminar rooms and tutorial RoomsAudio visual and video conference rooms Language laboratoriesDrama studios, music practice roomsEntrance halls, corridors, stairwells, atria and circulation spacesHalls and rooms <strong>for</strong> music drama & o<strong>the</strong>r live per<strong>for</strong>mancesLarge lecture <strong>the</strong>atres and flagship conference roomsLecture <strong>the</strong>atres up to 100 seatsLibrary circulation and media storage areasLibrary study areasRecording studiosRooms intended <strong>for</strong> clinical examination and treatment,confidential interviews, psycho<strong>the</strong>rapy, speech <strong>the</strong>rapy etc.Science laboratories, art & design studios, graphics workshopsSports halls and gymnasiaSwimming poolsWorkshopsMaximum value<strong>of</strong> LAeq,30 minutes40dB45dB35dB30dB45dB30dB30dB35dB40dB35dB25dB35dB35dB40dB50dB40dBRain falling on lightweight ro<strong>of</strong>s can cause disturbing noise inside <strong>the</strong> building, <strong>for</strong> examplein a sports hall used <strong>for</strong> examinations. This subject is still developing and <strong>the</strong>re is as yet nostandard <strong>for</strong> measuring noise from rain within buildings. The variability <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> wea<strong>the</strong>r is anadded difficulty when setting standards <strong>for</strong> this since very exceptional rainfalls will occurPart 3 | G eneral design10 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>occasionally. Building designers are expected to supply in<strong>for</strong>mation about expected rainnoise levels in <strong>the</strong> light <strong>of</strong> up to date knowledge and experience on o<strong>the</strong>r similar projects.3.8.6 Room AcousticsControl <strong>of</strong> reverberation within buildings is important in creating good learning and workingconditions within <strong>the</strong> building. The quantity listed in <strong>the</strong> table below is <strong>the</strong> mid frequencyreverberation time, Tmf, as defined in BB93 (and based on measurements made accordingto ISO 3382:2000. This is obtained by calculating <strong>the</strong> arithmetic average <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>reverberation times in <strong>the</strong> octave bands centred on 500 Hz, 1,000 Hz and 2,000 Hz. As wellas being important in its own right, <strong>the</strong> reverberation time enters into <strong>the</strong> calculation <strong>of</strong>standardised sound insulation parameters.Type(s) <strong>of</strong> roomAcademic staff and admin <strong>of</strong>ficesCafeterias, c<strong>of</strong>fee bars etc.Class rooms, lecture rooms, seminar rooms and tutorial RoomsAudio visual and video conference rooms Language laboratoriesDrama studios, music practice roomsEntrance halls, corridors, stairwells, atria and circulation spacesHalls and rooms <strong>for</strong> music drama and o<strong>the</strong>r live per<strong>for</strong>mancesLarge lecture <strong>the</strong>atres and flagship conference roomsLecture <strong>the</strong>atres up to 100 seatsLibrary circulation and media storage areasLibrary study areasRecording studiosRooms intended <strong>for</strong> clinical examination and treatment, Confidentialinterviews, psycho<strong>the</strong>rapy and speech <strong>the</strong>rapyScience laboratories, art and design studios, graphics workshopsSports halls and gymnasiaSwimming poolsWorkshopsMaximumvalue <strong>of</strong> Tmf1.0 s1.0 s0.8 s1.2 s1.0 s1.2 s1.0 s0.8 s1.0 s0.8 s0.6 s0.6 s0.8 s1.5 s2.0 s1.0 sThe reverberation time at lower frequencies tends to be greater than at <strong>the</strong> midrangefrequencies dealt with in <strong>the</strong> above table. Reverberation times at 250 Hz and 125 Hz shouldnot exceed <strong>the</strong> above figures by more than 30%.Reverberation times in awkward shaped spaces such as corridors and stair wells aredifficult to predict and measure. In <strong>the</strong>se spaces, complying with <strong>the</strong> guidance in ApprovedDocument E should result in satisfactory reverberation conditions.3.8.7 Noise from Building ServicesNoise from building services should not exceed <strong>the</strong> noise rating (NR) values listed below.This includes noise from <strong>the</strong> normal operation <strong>of</strong> heating, ventilation and air conditioningplant. Higher levels may be permissible during purge ventilation. When planning ventilationduct runs, <strong>the</strong>y should as far as possible avoid crossing partition walls, and where this isinevitable a crosstalk silencer must be incorporated so that <strong>the</strong> sound insulationrequirements listed earlier are met.Part 3 | G eneral design11 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Type (s) <strong>of</strong> roomMaximumvalue <strong>of</strong> TmfAcademic staff and admin <strong>of</strong>fices NR 35Cafeterias, c<strong>of</strong>fee bars etc. NR 40Class rooms, lecture rooms, seminar rooms and tutorial RoomsNR 30Audio visual and video conference rooms Language laboratoriesDrama studios, music practice rooms NR 30Entrance halls, corridors, stairwells, atria and circulation spaces NR 40Halls and rooms <strong>for</strong> music drama and o<strong>the</strong>r live per<strong>for</strong>mances NR 30Large lecture <strong>the</strong>atres and flagship conference rooms NR 30Lecture <strong>the</strong>atres up to 100 seats NR 30Library circulation and media storage areas NR 35Library study areas and Recording studios NR 30Rooms intended <strong>for</strong> clinical examination and treatment,NR 35confidential interviews, psycho<strong>the</strong>rapy, speech <strong>the</strong>rapy etc.Science laboratories, art and design studios, graphics workshops NR 30Sports halls and gymnasia NR 35Swimming pools NR 50Workshops NR 353.8.8 Acoustic <strong>Design</strong> <strong>of</strong> Residential AccommodationThe Building Regulations Approved Document E – Resistance to <strong>the</strong> passage <strong>of</strong> sound,provides guidance and sets <strong>the</strong> requirements <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> acoustic design <strong>of</strong> residentialaccommodation3.9 Fire Strategy3.9.1 <strong>Design</strong>ing to Prevent FiresBS 9999.2008 (Code <strong>of</strong> practice <strong>for</strong> fire safety in <strong>the</strong> design, management and use <strong>of</strong>buildings) should be used <strong>for</strong> design <strong>of</strong> all new buildings. The Joint Code on Fire Preventionin Construction Sites provides guidance to designers and places a number <strong>of</strong> requirementson <strong>the</strong>m. The code applies on projects over £2.5m and designers are to note that <strong>the</strong> codestates that “<strong>the</strong> design should be assessed to ensure that fire risk and potential <strong>for</strong> damagehave been fully considered to keep to a minimum during construction and use.” UWEexpects this assessment to be co-ordinated by <strong>the</strong> lead designer.HSG168 also contains guidance on designers responsibilities, including measures such asdesign proposals to reduce <strong>the</strong> amount <strong>of</strong> flammable materials on site, use <strong>of</strong> temporarycompartmentation (or o<strong>the</strong>r fire-engineering solutions) or design solutions that reduceignition sources (e.g. limits hot works).In general, designs should allow temporary accommodation to be outside <strong>of</strong> buildings. Ifthis is to be located within buildings, <strong>the</strong> location should be carefully considered to minimiserisks presented by any additional ignition and fuel sources introduced.On all projects, regardless <strong>of</strong> value, UWE requires that designers consider <strong>the</strong> followingitems which are copied verbatim from <strong>the</strong> joint code:• The use <strong>of</strong> non-combustible and non-flammable materials to reduce fire loads• Materials and methods that avoid <strong>the</strong> need <strong>for</strong> hot work on sitePart 3 | G eneral design12 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>• <strong>Design</strong> details that prevent <strong>the</strong> passage <strong>of</strong> smoke and flames up through a buildingduring <strong>the</strong> construction phase• <strong>Design</strong> <strong>of</strong> access routes to enable <strong>the</strong> contractors to construct buildings in such amanner as to retain safe evacuation routes during <strong>the</strong> construction phase• <strong>Design</strong> <strong>for</strong> fire fighting systems and fire alarms systems to allow early use – possibly ona partial use basis.Fur<strong>the</strong>r specific guidance relating to design principles relating to BS9999 can be found inThe LPC <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> Fire Protection <strong>of</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong> 2000 published by <strong>the</strong> FireProtection Association 1Relevant fire strategy in<strong>for</strong>mation must accompany designs. This should comply withAnnex H <strong>of</strong> BS9999. Where possible, in<strong>for</strong>mation should be conveyed in apictorial/diagrammatic <strong>for</strong>m to aid rapid understanding. An example is included below:UWE expects all new builds and major refurbishments to comply with BS9999.3.9.2 Constructing Near Gas InstallationsWales and <strong>West</strong> (gas utility company) limits or prohibits certain works within particulardistances <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir installations, as detailed in <strong>the</strong>ir publication “General Conditions to beobserved <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> Protection <strong>of</strong> Apparatus and <strong>the</strong> Prevention <strong>of</strong> Disruption to Gas Supplies”.If designs will involve excavations, UWE requires designers to undertake necessaryinvestigations to establish proximity <strong>of</strong> works to gas installations and to conduct anysubsequent discussions or notifications as required by Wales and <strong>West</strong>.1 being superseded by <strong>the</strong> revised <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> seriesPart 3 | G eneral design13 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>3.9.3 Fire <strong>Design</strong> Strategy <strong>for</strong> Persons with DisabilitiesLegal RequirementsEvery person responsible <strong>for</strong> fire safety measures in all categories <strong>of</strong> premises o<strong>the</strong>r than asingle private dwelling must comply with <strong>the</strong> requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Regulatory Re<strong>for</strong>m (FireSafety) Order 2005 (RRO): to carry out a fire risk assessment <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> premises, or appoint acompetent person to do so.One <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> many elements comprising a fire risk assessment is to assess what provisionsare in place to enable all disabled persons present in <strong>the</strong> premises to be able to safely leave<strong>the</strong> building in an emergency. Having assessed <strong>the</strong> facilities that are in place, <strong>the</strong>responsible person must put in place any procedures necessary and provide anyequipment necessary, to ensure that such emergency evacuation is achievable.Apart from <strong>the</strong> RRO, <strong>the</strong> responsible person must also ensure compliance with <strong>the</strong>Disability Discrimination Act 1995 and 2005 (DDA) and that (in new buildings) BS9999:2008 (Code <strong>of</strong> Practice <strong>for</strong> fire safety in <strong>the</strong> design, management and use <strong>of</strong>buildings) is achieved. The DDA requires that a disabled person is treated <strong>the</strong> same as aperson without a disability, with regard to such matters as access to and egress from abuilding. BS 9999 gives all necessary technical specification <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> size and location <strong>of</strong>disabled refuges, emergency communications systems, disabled evacuation lifts, etc.Practical MeasuresThe first step in making adequate provision <strong>for</strong> disabled persons’ emergency evacuation isto assess <strong>the</strong> needs <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> disabled person and make any necessary provision <strong>for</strong> suchevacuation, as long as it is ‘reasonably practicable’. The Department <strong>for</strong> Communities andLocal Government (CLG) provide a guide on this – Fire Safety Risk Assessment - Means <strong>of</strong>Escape <strong>for</strong> Disabled People (Supplementary <strong>Guide</strong>).The guide outlines what is required regarding <strong>the</strong> need <strong>for</strong> Personal Emergency EvacuationPlans (PEEPs) and how <strong>the</strong>y should be implemented.Carrying out a PEEPUWE should arrange an interview with <strong>the</strong> disabled person. This should consider what <strong>the</strong>building, <strong>the</strong> management and <strong>the</strong> disabled person can <strong>of</strong>fer <strong>for</strong> inclusion; it should neverbe assumed that a disabled person cannot do anything to assist in his/her escape from <strong>the</strong>building. Different types <strong>of</strong> disability and different constraints that this places upon <strong>the</strong>individual all have to be considered. It is common to always think <strong>of</strong> a physically disabledperson confined to a wheelchair when considering <strong>the</strong> needs <strong>of</strong> a disabled person;however, <strong>the</strong> disability may be vision impairment or hearing impairment, each <strong>of</strong> which willneed totally different considerations with regard to <strong>the</strong> facilities that need to be provided.When a person is physically disabled, it is not always <strong>the</strong> case that <strong>the</strong>ir disability willrequire <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong>, <strong>for</strong> example, an EVAC chair. It is <strong>of</strong>ten <strong>the</strong> case that a person who usesa wheelchair under normal everyday circumstances to move about, may have <strong>the</strong> means tomove without a wheelchair, <strong>for</strong> example by using a handrail or taking assistance from anassigned buddy’.Part <strong>of</strong> agreeing <strong>the</strong> PEEP is <strong>for</strong> each party to negotiate ‘reasonable adjustments’. While<strong>the</strong> DDA requires that adaptations should be made to <strong>the</strong> physical features <strong>of</strong> a building, itwould be deemed unreasonable if <strong>the</strong> disabled person were to demand <strong>the</strong> provision <strong>of</strong>, <strong>for</strong>example, a disabled egress lift if this is not feasible. The whole process should be one <strong>of</strong>realistic negotiations.Part 3 | G eneral design14 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>The CLG guide states that <strong>the</strong> following statements should be considered as part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>negotiation procedure:• Health and safety legislation requires building managers to ensure <strong>the</strong> safety <strong>of</strong> staffand visitors to a workplace.• The Regulatory Re<strong>for</strong>m (Fire Safety) Order 2005 requires that all people using <strong>the</strong>building be provided with adequate means <strong>of</strong> escape in case <strong>of</strong> fire. This includes asuitable escape plan.• There is also a responsibility <strong>for</strong> all staff using <strong>the</strong> building to be aware <strong>of</strong> and topractise <strong>the</strong> escape procedures periodically. It works on <strong>the</strong> principle that people areresponsible <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir own escape, which will be facilitated by <strong>the</strong> building managementand provided <strong>for</strong> by <strong>the</strong> responsible person.The statements recognise that disabled people have a very valuable contribution to maketo <strong>the</strong> process. They are expected to volunteer any in<strong>for</strong>mation that is required regarding<strong>the</strong>ir ability to assist in <strong>the</strong>ir own emergency escape if possible.Implementing <strong>the</strong> StrategyAt <strong>the</strong> design and construction phase guidance should be sought from Approved DocumentM or BS 9999:2008; <strong>the</strong> following in<strong>for</strong>mation is based on BS 9999.Horizontal EscapePhased evacuation involves evacuating <strong>the</strong> compartment containing <strong>the</strong> fire first. Theremainder <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> premises is put on alert or standby until such time as <strong>the</strong> fire spreads or isbrought under control. During <strong>the</strong> first phase, disabled people can be evacuated using anevacuation lift if provided, or o<strong>the</strong>r facilities as appropriate.Zoned or progressive horizontal evacuation involves people moving horizontally from onefire compartment to ano<strong>the</strong>r where <strong>the</strong>y may continue with vertical evacuation if necessary.This method <strong>of</strong> evacuation requires more than one staircase and adequate verticalcompartmentation.Vertical EscapeThis <strong>for</strong>ms part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> overall evacuation from <strong>the</strong> upper floors <strong>of</strong> a building or frombasements to an ultimate place <strong>of</strong> safety where people can move freely away from <strong>the</strong>building.For <strong>the</strong> evacuation <strong>of</strong> disabled people it will be necessary to provide additional, specificfacilities to a building to ensure that such evacuation can be carried out swiftly andeffectively.In addition to <strong>the</strong> provision <strong>of</strong> PEEPs and associated facilities such as EVAC chairs, <strong>the</strong>re isa requirement to provide additional physical arrangements such as refuge areas,communications and disabled lifts.Evacuation LiftsIf <strong>the</strong> lift <strong>for</strong>ms part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> overall evacuation plan, <strong>the</strong>n it should be an evacuation lift. Itshould normally be used as a passenger lift and preferably not only <strong>for</strong> evacuation, or o<strong>the</strong>ruse such as a goods lift. Please see separate specification.Part 3 | G eneral design15 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>RefugesThe purpose <strong>of</strong> having refuges <strong>for</strong> disabled people evacuating a building is to provide acomparatively safe place where <strong>the</strong>y can break <strong>the</strong>ir journey while making <strong>the</strong>ir way out. If adisabled person is able to move, unaided, horizontally across a building but requiresassistance to complete <strong>the</strong> vertical phase <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir evacuation, <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> refuge is <strong>the</strong> placewhere <strong>the</strong> two phases meet or overlap.If <strong>the</strong> PEEP requires a non-disabled person to provide assistance in <strong>the</strong> vertical escapestage, <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> refuge <strong>for</strong>ms part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> PEEP as <strong>the</strong> meeting point <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> two people.Whe<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong> vertical stage is by EVAC chair or disabled evacuation lift is irrelevant. Therefuge should af<strong>for</strong>d adequate protection against <strong>the</strong> fire and smoke until such time as <strong>the</strong>pre-arranged assistance may be provided.A refuge is part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> total evacuation process. It must never be used as a place toabandon disabled people until <strong>the</strong> fire brigade takes over <strong>the</strong> evacuation process. It isincumbent upon occupiers to do everything <strong>the</strong>y can do to move <strong>the</strong> disabled person(s) asfar as <strong>the</strong>y can out <strong>of</strong> a building, in whatever time <strong>the</strong>y have available prior to <strong>the</strong> arrival <strong>of</strong><strong>the</strong> fire brigade.A refuge should be located on <strong>the</strong> escape route, accessible in <strong>the</strong> direction <strong>of</strong> escape flow.Refuges should be provided on every storey <strong>for</strong> each protected staircase or external fireescape staircase. Each refuge should be a minimum <strong>of</strong> 900mm x 1400mm to allow <strong>for</strong>manoeuvring and accommodation <strong>of</strong> all sizes <strong>of</strong> wheelchairs. The access door should be aminimum <strong>of</strong> 850mm width and <strong>the</strong> corridor leading to it should be a minimum <strong>of</strong> 900mm.Most premises will only require <strong>the</strong> minimum size to allow <strong>for</strong> one wheelchair user. Where itis anticipated that, in specific circumstances, a larger number <strong>of</strong> wheelchair users will needto be accommodated, <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> size or number <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> refuge(s) should be increasedaccordingly.Where it is not possible to have a refuge located within a protected staircase enclosure, it ispermissible to use an adjacent lobby, corridor or room, provided that such a refuge issubject to <strong>the</strong> same level <strong>of</strong> fire protection as <strong>the</strong> remainder <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> escape route. It is also arequirement that <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> such an alternative location does not reduce <strong>the</strong> width <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>escape route nor obstruct <strong>the</strong> flow <strong>of</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r persons using <strong>the</strong> escape route to leave <strong>the</strong>building.3.10 UWE Health & Safety UnitUWE’s Health & Safety Unit maintain a web site detailing <strong>the</strong> H&S parameters <strong>the</strong>university must abide by. <strong>Design</strong>ers are required to have cognizance <strong>of</strong> this in relation to<strong>the</strong>ir designs.http://imp.uwe.ac.uk/imp_public/listEntry.asp?pid=4Construction related H&S issues/queries should be addressed to <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong>’sConstruction Health & Safety Manager.Part 3 | G eneral design16 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>3.11 Transport Strategy3.11.1 UWE Transport StrategyOverall ApproachThe <strong>University</strong> promotes <strong>the</strong> following general principles in regard to design <strong>of</strong> new andrefurbished transport infrastructure on campus:• Provision <strong>for</strong> transport users needs in a hierarchy, with pedestrians, cyclists anddisabled users at <strong>the</strong> top, followed by public transport users and <strong>the</strong>n private cars.• Application <strong>of</strong> Manual <strong>for</strong> Streets guidance, including especially shared spaceprinciples.• Spatial separation <strong>of</strong> transport infrastructure on campus, with <strong>the</strong> central areas <strong>of</strong>campus primarily designed <strong>for</strong> pedestrians, with parking peripheral to <strong>the</strong> site.• Consideration <strong>of</strong> all transport needs within <strong>the</strong> design process, including <strong>for</strong> examplesafe and efficient servicing access and consideration <strong>of</strong> access <strong>for</strong> all modes includingmotorcycle, taxi, etc.• Legible pedestrian routes <strong>for</strong> key routes within campus to be streng<strong>the</strong>ned through <strong>the</strong>design process.• Cycle facilities in new build shall have adequate sheltered and secure cycle parking,lockers and showers, including facilities <strong>for</strong> disabled persons who may use ahand-powered cycle and require storage <strong>for</strong> a wheelchair. New cycle parking to followBristol City Council guidance• (http://www.bristol.gov.uk/ccm/content/Environment-Planning/Planning/planning-guidance---cycle-parking.en)The design team will be expected to work closely with <strong>the</strong> Local Authority to ensure that allrequirements <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> site specific transport strategy, traffic assessment and environmentalimpact assessment are met.3.11.2 Operations AccessThe building design should allow sufficient space and routes <strong>of</strong> access <strong>for</strong> vehicles tooperate safe and efficiently during <strong>the</strong> maintenance and operation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building.<strong>Design</strong>ers should undertake tracking studies and confirm that vehicles have sufficientclearance space, head room etc.It is UWE’s preference that maintenance vehicles are able to access relevant areas without<strong>the</strong> need to reverse although will accept this in designated loading bays. A detailed riskevaluation is required if such vehicles need to reverse across pedestrian areas but UWEwill not accept designs that require vehicles to reverse across heavily used pedestrianareas.Demarcation, guarding and lighting <strong>of</strong> areas used <strong>for</strong> vehicle operations should meetstatutory requirements (especially <strong>the</strong> Workplace (Health, Safety and Welfare)Regulations) and HSE guidance.3.12 Drawing Production & CAD StandardsSee separate <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> UWE Drawing Production & CAD Standards.Part 3 | G eneral design17 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>3.13 Guidance <strong>for</strong> Cataloguing Rooms3.13.1 Room Numbering and Internal SignageIt is crucial that staff, students and visitors can navigate around a building following a clearlyidentifiable and logical directional system. There<strong>for</strong>e all room numbering and internalsignage should comply with <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong>’s current policies on room numbering andsignage. A set <strong>of</strong> as-built drawings must be provided (in CAD and paper <strong>for</strong>mat) to <strong>the</strong>space management team, who will mark up <strong>the</strong> room numbering on <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong>’s behalf.As room numbers link into o<strong>the</strong>r data such as fire alarm systems, M & E controls, assetmanagement and asbestos records it is imperative that room numbering con<strong>for</strong>ms to <strong>the</strong><strong>University</strong>’s standards from <strong>the</strong> outset. Any later changes to room numbering due to afailure by consultants/contractors to comply with <strong>University</strong> guidelines may incur costpenalties.The space team has produced a standard room numbering policy (Guidance <strong>for</strong>Cataloguing Rooms - SPP3) and room number request <strong>for</strong>m (SPF3) in order to ensurethat its room numbering is strictly adhered to. These are available at(http://cetts.uwe.ac.uk/spacemanagement.asp) or by contacting <strong>the</strong> space managementteam at Space.Management@uwe.ac.uk.A copy is attached; however, designers should ensure that <strong>the</strong> current version is consulted.Under no circumstances should internal staff or external contractors/consultantsassign <strong>the</strong>ir own room numbering system to any remodelling or new build project.Part 3 | G eneral design18 | P age


Guidance <strong>for</strong> Cataloguing Rooms (SPP3)Numbering and MeasuringLast Amended: 27 April 2011Richard BirdPart 3 | G eneral design19 | P age


Guidance <strong>for</strong> Cataloguing Rooms1.0 Gross External Area (GEA)Gross External Area is <strong>the</strong> area <strong>of</strong> a building measured externally at each floor level.Including1.1 Perimeter wall thickness and externalProjections, covered ways and fire escapes1.2 Areas occupied by internal walls andPartitions1.3 Columns, piers, chimney breasts,stairwells, lift-wells, and <strong>the</strong> like1.4 Atria and entrance halls, with clearheight above, measured at base levelonly1.5 Internal balconiesExcluding1.16 External open-sided balconies,1.17 Canopies1.18 Open vehicle parking areas, ro<strong>of</strong>terraces, and <strong>the</strong> like1.19 Voids over or under structural, rakedor stepped floors1.20 Greenhouses, garden stores, fuelstores, and <strong>the</strong> like in residentialproperty1.6 Structural, raked or stepped floors areto be treated as a level floor measuredhorizontally1.7 Horizontal floors, whe<strong>the</strong>r accessibleor not, below structural, raked orstepped floors1.8 Mezzanine areas intended <strong>for</strong> use withpermanent access1.9 Lift rooms, plant rooms, fuel stores,tank rooms which are housed in acovered structure <strong>of</strong> a permanentnature, whe<strong>the</strong>r or not above <strong>the</strong> mainro<strong>of</strong> level1.10 Outbuildings which share at least onewall with <strong>the</strong> main building1.11 Loading bays1.12 Areas with a headroom <strong>of</strong> less than1.5m1.13 Pavement vaults1.14 Garages1.15 ConservatoriesPart 3 | G eneral design20 | P age


Guidance <strong>for</strong> Cataloguing Rooms2.0 Gross Internal Area (GIA)Gross Internal Area is <strong>the</strong> area <strong>of</strong> a building measured to <strong>the</strong> internal face <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> perimeterwalls at each floor level.Drawings must show GIA <strong>for</strong> each block. Where multiple blocks exist within one building<strong>the</strong> GIA <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> block will <strong>for</strong>m along <strong>the</strong> centre line <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> wall where <strong>the</strong> two blocks meet.This ensures that no area is unaccounted <strong>for</strong>.Including2.1 Areas occupied by internal walls andPartitions2.2 Columns, piers, chimney breasts, stairwells,lift-wells, o<strong>the</strong>r internal projections, verticalducts, and <strong>the</strong> like2.3 Atria and entrance halls, with clear heightabove, measured at base level only2.4 Internal open-sided balconies, walkways,and <strong>the</strong> like2.5 Structural, raked or stepped floors areproperty to be treated as a level floor measuredHorizontallyExcluding2.18 Perimeter wall thicknesses andexternal projections2.19 External open-sided balconies,covered ways and fire escapes2.20 Canopies2.21 Voids over or under structural, rakedor stepped floors2.22 Greenhouses, garden stores, fuelstores, and <strong>the</strong> like in residential2.6 Horizontal floors, with permanent access,below structural, raked or stepped floors2.7 Corridors <strong>of</strong> a permanent essential nature(e.g. fire corridors, smoke lobbies)2.8 Mezzanine floor areas with permanentaccess2.9 Lift rooms, plant rooms, fuel stores, tankrooms which are housed in a covered structure<strong>of</strong> a permanent nature, whe<strong>the</strong>r or not above<strong>the</strong> main ro<strong>of</strong> level2.10 Service accommodation such as toilets,toilet lobbies, bathrooms, showers, changingrooms, cleaners’ rooms, and <strong>the</strong> like2.11 Projection rooms2.12 Voids over stairwells and lift shafts onupper floors2.13 Loading bays2.14 Areas with a headroom <strong>of</strong> lessthan 1.5m2.15 Pavement vaults2.16 Garages2.17 ConservatoriesPart 3 | G eneral design21 | P age


Guidance <strong>for</strong> Cataloguing Rooms3.0 Net Internal Area (NIA)Net Internal Area is <strong>the</strong> usable area within a building measured to <strong>the</strong> internal face <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>perimeter walls at each floor level.To calculate <strong>the</strong> NIA, add all room areas toge<strong>the</strong>r and subtract space that is used in any <strong>of</strong><strong>the</strong> following ways:3.1 Toilets, toilet lobbies, bathrooms, cleaners’ rooms, etc.3.2 Lift rooms, plant rooms and tank rooms3.3 Stairwells, lift-wells and permanent lift lobbies3.4 Circulation areas, corridors and thresholds/recesses associated with access, but notthose parts that are usable areas3.5 Areas under <strong>the</strong> control <strong>of</strong> service or o<strong>the</strong>r external authorities including metercupboards and statutory service supply points3.6 The space occupied by permanent and continuous air-conditioning, heating or coolingapparatus, and ducting in so far as <strong>the</strong> space it occupies is rendered substantially unusable4.0 Room AreaRoom area is defined as: any internal space with a unique ‘room number’. This caninclude any <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> following: Lecture <strong>the</strong>atres, teaching rooms, <strong>of</strong>fices, kitchens, toilets,risers, plant, accommodation, etc. Mostrooms will be separated from o<strong>the</strong>rspaces by walls or glazing but this is notalways <strong>the</strong> case as some rooms may bemulti-functional and have multiple roomnumbers. The change in room or roomuse may be signified by a change inflooring or defined by <strong>the</strong> edge <strong>of</strong> acolumn or o<strong>the</strong>r marker.Measurements should be taken from <strong>the</strong>internal face <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> wall to include finishesnot to include skirting or trunking. In <strong>the</strong>case <strong>of</strong> floor to ceiling glazing,measurements should be taken from <strong>the</strong>face <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> glass. The height <strong>of</strong> a spacemust be greater than 1.5m and any area<strong>of</strong> a lower height than this should not beincluded. Internal structural walls, wallsenclosing excluded areas, columns,piers, chimney breasts and o<strong>the</strong>rprojections must be excluded. Areasthat are unusable because <strong>the</strong>y have adepth less than 0.25 (i.e. space betweena column and a wall) must be excluded.Part 3 | G eneral design22 | P age


Guidance <strong>for</strong> Cataloguing Rooms5.0 Basic Room NumberingThe university has several inconsistent numbering systems in place. In order to improveconsistency <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> future, <strong>the</strong> most common system currently in use will be adopted.5.01 General RoomsThis is <strong>the</strong> standard <strong>for</strong> room numbering:1 R 0 0 1Room or Space NumberAlways 3 DigitsBlock or Building CodeFloor or Level CodeThe Floor or Level Code should always come first, followed by <strong>the</strong> Block or Building Codeand with <strong>the</strong> three-digit Room or Space Number.LevelBlock or Building Code ExamplesB Basement A A Block0 Ground Floor ECC Exhibition and Conference Centre1 First Floor N N Block2 Second Floor [etc.] WF Wallscourt Farmhouse5.02 Special UsageA special usage code should apply to all stairs, lifts, ducts etc. See table below.Room UseC CorridorD DuctL LiftP PlantS StairV VoidIf this additional Special Usage letter code is used, it must be inserted directly after <strong>the</strong>Block or Building Code. For example, in <strong>the</strong> case <strong>of</strong> a stairway:1 R S 0 0 1Room or Space NumberAlways 3 DigitsRoom Use Code (Example: Stair)Block or Building CodeFloor or Level Code5.03 Sub-Divided RoomsWhen rooms have sub-rooms that cannot be accessed from a corridor or when a room isdivided to produce multiple rooms.Part 3 | G eneral design23 | P age


Guidance <strong>for</strong> Cataloguing Rooms1 R 0 0 1 ASub-RoomCodeRoom Number. Always 3 DigitsBlock or Building CodeFloor or Level Code5.04 Multiple Space TypesWhen a room has one number but multiple space types (eg stair cores have: stairs,circulation space and a void through <strong>the</strong> middle)1 R S V 0 0 1Room Number. Always 3 DigitsSub Space Code (Example: Void)Room Use Code (Example: Stair)Block or Building CodeFloor or Level CodeSub SpaceCVCirculationVoid5.05 Student AccommodationOnce again, <strong>the</strong>re is little uni<strong>for</strong>mity in <strong>the</strong> numbering systems <strong>of</strong> student accommodation.We are attempting to rectify this with <strong>the</strong> Frenchay Student Village. In <strong>the</strong> Village, each flatusually contains six rooms which are numbered 1 to 6. The letter ‘R’ is used to delineateeach room within <strong>the</strong> flat, followed by <strong>the</strong> flat number and individual room number. Forensuite bathrooms an ‘A’ should follow after <strong>the</strong> room number, i.e. 1Q1R103-1A. For o<strong>the</strong>rareas contained within <strong>the</strong> building, <strong>the</strong> room code R can be substituted by whatever isrelevant, i.e., C <strong>for</strong> Corridor, D <strong>for</strong> Duct, K <strong>for</strong> Kitchen, etc.1 Q 1 R 1 0 3 -1RoomNumberFlat Number. Always 3 DigitsRoom Use Code (Example: Room)Block Number CodeBlock or Building Code (Example: Quantock Court)Floor or Level CodePart 3 | G eneral design24 | P age


Guidance <strong>for</strong> Cataloguing RoomsRoom UseBuilding CodeAC Airing Cupboard B Brecon CourtBS Bin Store CT Cotswold CourtC Corridor H The HolliesCS Cycle Store M Mendip CourtD Duct Q Quantock CourtEL Electrics CupboardK KitchenL LaundryO Office Block CodeP Plant Room 1 Block 1R Room 2 Block 2S Stair 3 Block 3ST Store 4 Block 4 [etc.]T ToiletTS Toilet ShowerAt <strong>the</strong> Hollies, <strong>the</strong> numbering system is slightly different. Here, instead <strong>of</strong> being numbered,each room within a flat has received an identifying letter, from ‘A’ to a possible ‘H’. A roomnumber would <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e be shown as 0H6R002A, which translates as Level Zero, Hollies,Block 6, Flat Number 002, Room A. Each one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> rooms at <strong>the</strong> Hollies has a built-inwardrobe which is shown separately on <strong>the</strong> drawings. These are represented by <strong>the</strong>number ‘1’ directly after <strong>the</strong> full room number, i.e. 0H6R002A1. The warden’s rooms at <strong>the</strong>Hollies are <strong>the</strong> only rooms which contain an en-suite toilet and shower. These arerepresented by <strong>the</strong> number ‘2’ following <strong>the</strong> full room number, i.e. 0H6R102F2.6.0 Cataloguing and Numbering StairsStair cores are to be divided into <strong>the</strong>ir component parts as indicated by <strong>the</strong> diagrams below.The area under <strong>the</strong> ground floor stair may be used as a cupboard, in which case it musthave its own number if <strong>the</strong>re is at least 1.5m <strong>of</strong> head room. If <strong>the</strong> number <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> stair is1BS001 <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> void will be 1BSV001 and <strong>the</strong> circulation space will be 1BSC001.Steps or ramps that occur in split level rooms (so long as <strong>the</strong> change in level is less than awhole floor) must be included within <strong>the</strong> area <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> room, no additional record should becreated.Part 3 | G eneral design25 | P age


Guidance <strong>for</strong> Cataloguing Rooms7.0 Numbering Space in New DevelopmentsNumbering in an area should be done sequentially from left to right or in a clockwisedirection as indicated on <strong>the</strong> diagram below.Part 3 | G eneral design26 | P age


Guidance <strong>for</strong> Cataloguing RoomsPart 3 | G eneral design27 | P age


Room Number Request Form(SPF3)Please complete this <strong>for</strong>m if you require room number(s) to be allocated due to one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>following:-• Part 1: New Build• Part 2 Remodelling <strong>of</strong> existing space within a buildingPlease return <strong>the</strong> completed <strong>for</strong>m to <strong>the</strong> Space Planning Team at:Email: Space.Management@uwe.ac.ukPost: Facilities (CETTS), Mallard House, Frenchay CampusPart 3 | G eneral design28 | P age


Part A: Estates Contact DetailsContact nameTelephone NoEmail addressSignatureDatePart B: AuthorisationApproved byProject LeaderSignatureDateApproved bySpace PlanningManagerDatabase UpdatedSignatureCAD updatedDatePart 3 | G eneral design29 | P age


Part 1: New BuildPlease attach a copy <strong>of</strong> any drawings that show <strong>the</strong> rooms that require numbering.IMPORTANT: All drawings must adhere to UWE’s room numbering policy. Under nocircumstances should contractors/consultants use <strong>the</strong>ir own room numbering system.1. When will <strong>the</strong> new building becomplete?2. Are <strong>the</strong> drawings you havesupplied as-built or are <strong>the</strong>ysubject to change?3. Can space use be easilyidentified from <strong>the</strong> drawing?e.g. duct, riser, etc4. What is <strong>the</strong> proposed deadline<strong>for</strong> room numbering? (Pleaseallow at least two weeks’ notice<strong>for</strong> room numbering <strong>of</strong> a newbuild)5. What is <strong>the</strong> latest date <strong>for</strong>ordering room signage <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong>new building?6. What is <strong>the</strong> proposed occupationdate <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> building?7. Who will occupy <strong>the</strong> building?8. Please supply a contact nameand number in case <strong>of</strong> anyqueries regarding <strong>the</strong> drawings.Part 3 | G eneral design30 | P age


Part 2: Remodelling <strong>of</strong> existing space within a buildingPlease provide drawings showing <strong>the</strong> be<strong>for</strong>e and after change(s) to <strong>the</strong> space.IMPORTANT: All drawings must adhere to UWE’s room numbering policy. Under nocircumstances should contractors/consultants use <strong>the</strong>ir own room numbering system.1. When will <strong>the</strong> alterations to <strong>the</strong>space be complete?2. Are <strong>the</strong> drawings you havesupplied complete or are <strong>the</strong>ysubject to change?3. Was <strong>the</strong> Space PlanningManager consulted regarding<strong>the</strong>se alterations?4. Can space use be easilyidentified from <strong>the</strong> drawing?e.g. duct, riser, etc5. What is <strong>the</strong> proposed deadline<strong>for</strong> room numbering? (Pleaseallow at least five working days’notice <strong>for</strong> room numbering)6. What is <strong>the</strong> proposed occupationdate <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se rooms?7. Who will occupy <strong>the</strong>se rooms?8. Please supply a contact nameand number in case <strong>of</strong> anyqueries regarding <strong>the</strong> drawings.Part 3 | G eneral design31 | P age


This page is intentionally blank


UWE Facilities<strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>R BlockPart 4Building & Civil Engineering


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>IndexPart 1Part 2Part 3Part 4IntroductionSpace StandardsGeneral <strong>Design</strong>Building and Civil Engineering4.1 General Requirements4.2 Demolitions4.3 <strong>Design</strong> Codes and Building Regulations4.4 Imposed Loads and Per<strong>for</strong>mance4.5 Foundations4.6 Structural Form4.6.1 Building Form & Envelope4.7 Ro<strong>of</strong>4.8 External Doors4.9 External Finishes4.9.1 Cladding4.9.2 Curtain Walling4.9.3 Render4.10 Internal Walls and Doors4.11 Internal Finishes4.11.1 General Provisions4.11.2 Plasterboard4.11.3 Tiles4.11.4 Suspended Ceiling4.11.5 Flooring4.11.6 Painting4.12 Windows4.13 CDM Extension to Existing <strong>Buildings</strong>4.14 Delivery Yards4.15 Fixtures and Fittings4.16 Handover4.17 Post-Occupancy AssessmentPart 5Part 6Part 7M & E RequirementsSpecialist InstallationsWayfindingIndex


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>4.0 Building and Civil Engineering4.1 General RequirementsThis section gives <strong>the</strong> design team an overview <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> requirements UWE will require inrelation to any structural elements required <strong>for</strong> future new build projects.The functional requirements <strong>of</strong> all UWE buildings and grounds can be categorised but arenot limited to <strong>the</strong> following:• The need <strong>for</strong> flexibility and adaptable space• The building should be naturally ventilated with provisionallowed <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> future installation <strong>of</strong> HVAC services.• The <strong>the</strong>rmal mass per<strong>for</strong>mance <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> structure and itseffect on <strong>the</strong> overall <strong>the</strong>rmal per<strong>for</strong>mance <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> buildingshell should be considered.• The foul and surface water outfalls both to <strong>the</strong> publicsewers and flood prevention scheme which encompasses<strong>the</strong> Ravine on <strong>the</strong> North East <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Frenchay Campus.• The future maintenance to be considered to comply with<strong>the</strong> requirements <strong>of</strong> The CDM regulations.• The consideration <strong>of</strong> specialist vehicle access such as fireappliances and ambulances, cranes etc• The consideration <strong>of</strong> fire fighting across <strong>the</strong> whole <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> campus and external spaces<strong>for</strong> emergency evacuation assembly points• The consideration <strong>of</strong> delivery vehicle access• The consideration <strong>of</strong> contractor vehicle access and future development/construction<strong>of</strong>fice/materials compoundsTo facilitate <strong>the</strong> efficient operation and maintenance <strong>of</strong> a structure, UWE requires thatidentification tags are used to identify <strong>the</strong> key components <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building envelope thatare liable to require replacement during <strong>the</strong> life <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building. These tags should containsufficient in<strong>for</strong>mation so that an operative could readily find more detailed in<strong>for</strong>mation inproperty manuals or in manufacturers’ literature.Refurbished LaboratoriesPart 4 | B uilding & Civil Engineering1 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>4.2 DemolitionsAll demolitions must be preceded by a suitable survey to determine <strong>the</strong> structural <strong>for</strong>m <strong>of</strong><strong>the</strong> building, <strong>the</strong> location <strong>of</strong> services etc. and consequently <strong>the</strong> most appropriatedemolition method.A full asbestos refurbishment and demolition survey must also be carried out on anystructures that were constructed be<strong>for</strong>e <strong>the</strong> year 2000. On larger projects which are likelyto generate significant numbers <strong>of</strong> samples, temporary laboratory facilities should beprovided within or close to <strong>the</strong> building to allow samples to be tested in a quick andefficient manner. UWE asbestos manager will determine when this applies in consultationwith <strong>the</strong> UWE asbestos consultants.All demolitions must be carried out in accordance with a written plan and must be plannedand undertaken so as to prevent damage to adjacent structures, underground servicesetc. Staff and students must be entirely excluded from areas <strong>of</strong> danger.Demolitions are subject to <strong>the</strong> UWE approval to work process, requiring writtenauthorisation by <strong>the</strong> Contract Administrator be<strong>for</strong>e <strong>the</strong>y proceed. All asbestos must beremoved prior to <strong>the</strong> demolition commencing.<strong>Design</strong>ers and contractors must identify ways <strong>of</strong> reusing or recycling <strong>the</strong> arisings from <strong>the</strong>demolition so as to minimise <strong>the</strong> amount <strong>of</strong> material being sent to landfill. Where <strong>the</strong> SiteWaste Management Plan Regulations apply (projects over £300,000), <strong>the</strong> Plan mustprovide details <strong>of</strong> how this is to be achieved. On projects <strong>of</strong> lower value, wastemanagement arrangements must <strong>for</strong>m part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> plan <strong>of</strong> work. Works and waste must bemanaged so as to prevent dust from creating a nuisance or posing a risk.Careful co-ordination is also needed with UWE departments and faculties to determine<strong>the</strong> most appropriate arrangements <strong>of</strong> limiting noise nuisances: This consultation will beled by <strong>the</strong> Contract Administrator but will require <strong>the</strong> input and co-operation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>contractor. Where mud or dirt is likely to be carried on to roads <strong>the</strong> contractor must makesuitable provision in <strong>the</strong>ir costs and plan <strong>of</strong> work <strong>for</strong> keeping roads in a clean and safestate.4.3 <strong>Design</strong> Codes and Building RegulationsIn addition to <strong>the</strong> requirements <strong>of</strong> Section 3.2.1, <strong>the</strong> structures will be designed to:• All relevant EN Structural Eurocodes,• The requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Building Regulations,• Construction (<strong>Design</strong> and Management) Regulations 2007,• Any fur<strong>the</strong>r relevant legislation in <strong>for</strong>ce at <strong>the</strong> time <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> design.4.4 Imposed Loads and Per<strong>for</strong>manceIn general, loading will be in accordance with BS 6399 Pt 1 with <strong>the</strong> provision <strong>for</strong> <strong>of</strong>ficeaccommodation to be designed <strong>for</strong> 3.0 kN/m 2 to allow future flexibility <strong>for</strong> possible studioand classroom use. The loading requirements may be project specific and are to beconfirmed at outline proposal stage.The design team are to take into account loading requirements <strong>for</strong> plant and o<strong>the</strong>rservices within <strong>the</strong> building design, and temporary stability during construction. <strong>Design</strong>teams should also consider any potential use <strong>of</strong> mobile plant, scaffolding etc. in <strong>the</strong> space(e.g. to clean atrium, external windows etc). Where an item is not specifically referred to,best practice is to be adopted <strong>for</strong> loadings in accordance with industry standards.Part 4 | B uilding & Civil Engineering2 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>4.5 FoundationsA ground investigation report will be undertaken as a prerequisite prior to any specificdetailed foundation design works. A project option appraisal should be produced outlining<strong>the</strong> choice <strong>of</strong> foundations, holistically considering sustainable passive design options (i.e.ground source heat pumps) toge<strong>the</strong>r with associated cost in<strong>for</strong>mation. Any Radon reportsare available from <strong>the</strong> UWE Health and Safety Manager.Consideration must also be given to temporary measures to stabilise ground whenexcavating around existing buildings, and bridging details around services.A report will be required at outline proposal stage with a recommendation put <strong>for</strong>ward <strong>for</strong><strong>the</strong> foundation design solution.4.6 Structural FormThe design team will produce a report on <strong>the</strong> options <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> superstructure which will bebased on <strong>the</strong> recommended foundation design solution. The report should detail <strong>the</strong>options, <strong>the</strong> contribution <strong>of</strong> each option to <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>rmal per<strong>for</strong>mance <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building shelland <strong>the</strong> overall environmental impact. A fur<strong>the</strong>r report will be required once <strong>the</strong> option hasbeen decided, detailing load paths and mechanisms. The report will <strong>for</strong>m part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>building design documentation required.Due to <strong>the</strong> risk <strong>of</strong> fire, a detailed risk evaluation is required <strong>for</strong> any proposed timberframed structures on UWE sites.Use <strong>of</strong> pre- and post- tensioned and cantilevered elements should be <strong>the</strong> subject <strong>of</strong> adetailed risk evaluation to ensure that future adaptations/demolitions can be undertakensafely.4.6.1 Building fabric and envelope• Building orientation to maximise natural light and potential <strong>for</strong> renewable energyinstallations. Consider <strong>the</strong> requirement <strong>of</strong> brise-soleil to manage solar gains• Building fabric U values to exceed current regulations. See Part L2A Conservation <strong>of</strong>fuel and power.• Recycled content <strong>of</strong> building fabrics and recyclability <strong>of</strong> materials on demolition. BREGreen <strong>Guide</strong> to Specification details relative environmental impacts <strong>of</strong> commonconstruction materials and should be referred to.• Building segregation to be considered at design stage – keeping teaching spacesand <strong>of</strong>fices in separate zones to enable areas to be zoned <strong>of</strong>f during holidays• All external walls will provide a complete watertight, insulated and vapour controlledwall in compliance with current Building Regulations and legislation.• The per<strong>for</strong>mance at all junctions and intersections will be maintained. All openingswithin <strong>the</strong> envelope are to be compatible visually and technically with <strong>the</strong> externalwalls.• It is UWE’s preference that plant etc. can be removed and replaced withoutdismantling <strong>the</strong> surrounding envelope. However, <strong>the</strong> building envelope may need tobe designed to include some sacrificial elements to enable large items <strong>of</strong> plant to beremoved and/or replaced in <strong>the</strong> future. This provision should be subject to a detailedrisk evaluation. (See also Section 3.5).• Fur<strong>the</strong>r guidance on <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> insulation materials is given in <strong>the</strong> LPC <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> Fire Protection <strong>of</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong> 2000.Part 4 | B uilding & Civil Engineering3 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>4.7 Ro<strong>of</strong>R Block Ro<strong>of</strong>The ro<strong>of</strong> structure shall be designed and installed in accordance with <strong>the</strong> wind loadingsand exposure conditions and particularly at Frenchay Campus which is particularlyexposed. Wea<strong>the</strong>r tightness, high insulation and vapour control per<strong>for</strong>mance will bemaintained across all ro<strong>of</strong>s, including interfaces with external walls.Wherever possible, designs should prevent <strong>the</strong> need <strong>for</strong> access onto ro<strong>of</strong>s. If routineaccess is required to a ro<strong>of</strong> a fixed means <strong>of</strong> access must be provided. UWE’spreference is that access should be via a stairway (e.g. extension <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> stair core) ra<strong>the</strong>rthan ladder. While it is UWE’s preference that handrails (meeting <strong>the</strong> relevant standards)enclose all walkways and work areas, it is permissible <strong>for</strong> plastic chain link to demarkroutes or work areas that are more than 2.5m from an edge. Level, stable routes shouldbe provided over ro<strong>of</strong>s (e.g. a walkway <strong>of</strong> suitable construction fitted on to a pr<strong>of</strong>iled ro<strong>of</strong>system).Locks should only be operable by designated, <strong>of</strong>f-suite keys.A detailed risk evaluation is required in <strong>the</strong> following circumstances:• Access is to be via a ladder ra<strong>the</strong>r than stairs• Fall restraint system is required. If so, <strong>the</strong> installation must be a Latchways systemand positioned so that it requires <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> a 1500mm lanyard, it must be compliantwith Part L, it must be accompanied by a calculation package, design life must be notless than 25 years, all components should be stainless steel and installers must beapproved by <strong>the</strong> system supplier.• Access to <strong>the</strong> ro<strong>of</strong> is via a trapdoor/ opening ro<strong>of</strong>light.Fall arrest equipment is not to be used on ro<strong>of</strong>s at UWE.Ro<strong>of</strong> drainage is to be designed in accordance with BS 12056-3:2000.Ro<strong>of</strong>s which are partially or entirely glazed should be designed to prevent <strong>the</strong> need <strong>for</strong>operatives to walk upon <strong>the</strong>m or work within 2.5m <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>m. They should be designed inaccordance with CWCT Technical Guidance notes 66-69. Warning signs anddemarcation should prevent operatives walking on to <strong>the</strong>se ro<strong>of</strong>s. If operatives are towalk or work within 2.5m <strong>of</strong> a glazed ro<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>n handrails (or similar) should be deployed toprevent <strong>the</strong>m stepping onto <strong>the</strong> glazing. A detailed risk evaluation is required if <strong>the</strong>Part 4 | B uilding & Civil Engineering4 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>design requires operatives to walk or work on a glazed ro<strong>of</strong>. <strong>Design</strong>s should address andminimise <strong>the</strong> need to clean gutters & rainwater goods and glazing to ro<strong>of</strong>s.4.8 External DoorsRobust external doors will be provided to all entrances and means <strong>of</strong> escape positions.Additional doors will be required to plant rooms and refuse areas. Typically mainentrances will be double doors, fully glazed, automated and have level access whereverpossible.Access control, currently card access, to be fitted to enable doors to be secured as andwhen needed, such as out <strong>of</strong> hoursFittings and ironmongery are to be <strong>of</strong> a high quality, robust stainless steel or anodisedaluminium. Lock cylinders to be euro-pr<strong>of</strong>ile on UWE master Suite.4.9 External Finishes4.9.1 CladdingCladding to be lightweight with high <strong>the</strong>rmal per<strong>for</strong>mance and good aes<strong>the</strong>tic appearance.The chosen finish is to consider solar gain and careful use <strong>of</strong> colours. Products are tocontain recycled elements in manufacture and be capable <strong>of</strong> having more than 50%recycled at end <strong>of</strong> life disposal.The cladding system to be integral with <strong>the</strong> glazing system and look <strong>for</strong> minimum 40 yearlifespan.UWE has trialled & pioneered <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> “Modcell” panels into recent R Block designs.These rendered straw bales construction and could be considered in future designs.In order to facilitate construction and replacement, cladding panels must be in unit sizesto allow easy handling using readily available plant/equipment and trade skills.The design <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> system should consider independent removal <strong>of</strong> individual panels toallow <strong>for</strong> maintenance and replacement <strong>of</strong> damage and insertion <strong>of</strong> additional openings<strong>for</strong> new windows etc, or to allow working access <strong>for</strong> future refurbishments <strong>of</strong> upper floors.If may be <strong>for</strong>eseeable that during <strong>the</strong> life <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building, high level access will be requiredon <strong>the</strong> external façade <strong>of</strong> a clad building. If so, <strong>the</strong> cladding design should allow <strong>for</strong>access equipment to be tied in. If this is not possible <strong>the</strong>n a detailed design riskevaluation is required to explain how high level access can be safely achieved withreadily available plant/equipment which do not require advanced technical skills toerect/use.4.9.2 Curtain WallingCurtain walling to be good aes<strong>the</strong>tic appearance with specialist glazing to avoid solar gainand maximise insulation.Transoms and mullions to give clear sight lines and be integral to system used.Reference should be made to <strong>the</strong> Centre <strong>for</strong> Window and Cladding Technology whenspecifying curtain walling. The CWCT ‘Standard <strong>for</strong> systemised building envelopes’ givesa framework <strong>for</strong> specifying building envelopes and provides a ‘Specifiers checklist’showing in<strong>for</strong>mation that will change from project to project. This includes:Part 4 | B uilding & Civil Engineering5 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>4.9.3 Render• Internal and external environment• Air permeability• Thermal per<strong>for</strong>mance• Access and safety• <strong>Design</strong> lifehttp://www.cwct.co.uk/specification/home.htmRender to be to current British Standards and be fully bonded to substrate with a goodappearance and colours to be sympa<strong>the</strong>tic to surroundings.Detailing <strong>of</strong> adjacent cills, capping, flashings etc, to prevent moisture penetration.Overhangs (ro<strong>of</strong>) to be <strong>of</strong> sufficient dimensions to avoid “drip” staining.4.10 Internal Walls & DoorsInternal walls shall be designed and constructed so <strong>the</strong>y provide a secure and stablepartition between areas and spaces throughout <strong>the</strong> campus. The type and nature <strong>of</strong> anyinternal wall will have to be discussed and agreed by UWE Estates prior to construction,and this will be based on <strong>the</strong> general location and use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> room / area.Where blockwork is to be used, blocks should not weigh more than 20kg to reducemanual handling risks during construction or subsequent alterations. A detailed riskevaluation is required if a designer wishes to specify blocks in excess <strong>of</strong> this weight.Consideration to be given when constructing new stud partitions to incorporate additionalsupport battens <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> UWE Toprail support system.Internal doors will be provided to provide safe and effective access through all internalspaces and escape routes. Where necessary doors to comply with all current BuildingRegulations & <strong>the</strong> Disability Discrimination Act. Where doors <strong>for</strong>m part <strong>of</strong> firecompartment <strong>the</strong>y should fully comply with <strong>the</strong> requirements <strong>of</strong> BS9999 and provide equalprotection to <strong>the</strong> surrounding walls/Fittings & ironmongery are to be <strong>of</strong> a high quality finish, robust stainless steel or anodisedAluminium. Locks to be <strong>of</strong> a suitable pr<strong>of</strong>ile to fit UWE Kaba 20 cylinders.Where doors (or gates/shutters etc.) are powered <strong>the</strong>y must ‘fail safe’. The electricaldesign guide provides details <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> required interface with <strong>the</strong> fire alarm system.4.11 Internal Finishes4.11.1 General Provisions• Robust durable finishes appropriate to each functional space.• For renovation projects, consider <strong>the</strong> building’s character and existing finishes. Allmaterial patches should blend as closely as possible. Some buildings on campushave an existing palette that must be matched. Coordinate with <strong>the</strong> UWE PM.• All specified materials must demonstrate suitability <strong>for</strong> use in an institutional setting,with similar regularity <strong>of</strong> cleaning and maintenance.• Colour-through homogeneous materials are preferred.• Avoid material(s) that require routine sealing or significant specialized maintenance.• Construction and O&M documents must clearly identify and note all finishes,including <strong>the</strong>ir extent <strong>of</strong> coverage.Part 4 | B uilding & Civil Engineering6 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>• Stencil fire rating above ceiling at all fire-rated walls, in 150mm high letters at 6mcenters.• All finishes must complete curing & drying (<strong>of</strong>f-gassing) prior to SubstantialCompletion.4.11.2 Plasterboard4.11.3 Tiles• When used at ceilings or s<strong>of</strong>fits, provide access panels at regular spacing whererequired <strong>for</strong> access.• Plasterboard should meet WRAP requirement <strong>for</strong> recycled content.• Plasterboard wall linings are not deemed suitable <strong>for</strong> high trafficked locations (i.ecorridors), communal areas (i.e. social spaces) or student accommodation.Plasterboard wall linings should be assessed <strong>for</strong> suitability, but restricted to teaching,learning or <strong>of</strong>fice areas, unless o<strong>the</strong>rwise authorized by UWE Estates.• Consideration should be made <strong>for</strong> ply-backed detailing or alternatively <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong>wall-board.• Wet areas and/or tile backer board:– Use cement backer board <strong>for</strong> tile.– Avoid paper-faced moisture resistant gypsum board panels.• Floor Tiles:– Porcelain tile is recommended.– Cross-fall finished floor to floor drains.– Maintain adequate substrate to prevent lifting <strong>of</strong> tiles due to <strong>the</strong>rmal dynamicmovement <strong>of</strong> hidden services.– Glazed or polished tiles are prohibited.• Wall Tiles:– Colour contrasts to comply with current disability legislation.4.11.4 Suspended Ceilings4.11.5 Flooring• All ceilings should be designed to be easily accessible <strong>for</strong> maintenance and o<strong>the</strong>raccess requirements, such as future technology installations.• Tile size 600 x 600 with painted perimeter shadow batten.• Building Entrances: Provide primary and secondary walk <strong>of</strong>f carpet with metal trim asapplicable.• Lift floors: Rubber tile; Altro Mondopave• Wet laboratories: Use chemical resistant flooring.• Masonry flooring: Not permitted if it has significant fill and/or requires routine sealingor significant specialized maintenance.• Flooring materials not permitted by UWE:• Specialty flooring: bamboo, cork and laminate.• Wood flooring, except at gymnasiums and certain o<strong>the</strong>r specialized functions.• Stair Treads & Risers: Colour contrasts to comply with current disability legislation.• Carpeting:– Any existing carpeting removed <strong>for</strong> renovation must be recycled where everpossible. Justification must be provided <strong>for</strong> non-compliance.– Preferred Construction; Solution dyed, bleach pro<strong>of</strong> nylon construction. The use<strong>of</strong> polypropylene pile carpet is prohibited.– Minimum manufacturer’s warranty covering: wear, edge ravel, tuft bind,delamination and static control:– Barrier matting 5 years– Offices, teaching rooms and o<strong>the</strong>r area 10 years.Part 4 | B uilding & Civil Engineering7 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>4.11.6 Painting4.12 Windows• Manufacturers, products and colour ranges are to be restricted to <strong>the</strong> palate given in<strong>the</strong> UWE’s Standard B&CE Specification.Windows are to be design and constructed to meet <strong>the</strong> requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> appropriateBritish Standard and are to be, at least double glazed, <strong>the</strong>rmally broken and hermeticallysealed to meet <strong>the</strong> specification and test requirements <strong>of</strong> BS5713. UPVC window systemshould be avoidedThe glazing is to provide a sealed wea<strong>the</strong>r tight unit, fully integrated into <strong>the</strong> façadesystem and to be internally beaded <strong>for</strong> security and ease <strong>of</strong> replacement. Glazing to be KGlass or equivalent, solar reflective and insulating to maximise daylight without glare.Manifestation to be added to any large glazing areas which are at floor level. South facingwindows should consider solar shading.The function <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> room is to be considered at <strong>the</strong> design stage to facilitate <strong>the</strong>appropriate level <strong>of</strong> privacy. Permanent obscured glazing should be used ra<strong>the</strong>r thatretr<strong>of</strong>itted films.B BlockUWE encourages designs that allow windows to be cleaned from ground level (e.g. usingpole fed systems). A detailed design risk evaluation is required if cleaning:• Requires attachment to eyebolts• Requires use <strong>of</strong> mobile elevated work plat<strong>for</strong>ms (in which case sufficient hardstandingis required)• Is to be per<strong>for</strong>med from suspended cradles etc.No window, skylight or ventilator which is capable <strong>of</strong> being opened, closed, or adjustedshall be designed in a manner likely to expose <strong>the</strong> person per<strong>for</strong>ming such operation to arisk to <strong>the</strong>ir health or safety. It should be possible to reach and operate <strong>the</strong> control <strong>of</strong>openable windows, skylight or ventilators in a safe manner. Where necessary windowpoles or similar equipment should be kept available, or a stable plat<strong>for</strong>m or o<strong>the</strong>r safemeans <strong>of</strong> access should be provided. Controls should be placed that people are not likelyto fall through or out <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> window. Where <strong>the</strong>re is a danger <strong>of</strong> falling from height,devices should be provided to prevent <strong>the</strong> windows opening too far.Part 4 | B uilding & Civil Engineering8 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>No window, skylight or ventilator shall be positioned when opened which is likely toexpose any person to a risk to <strong>the</strong>ir health or safety. Open window, skylight or ventilatorsshould not project into an area where persons are likely to collide with <strong>the</strong>m. The bottomedge <strong>of</strong> opening windows should normally be at least 800mm above floor level, unless<strong>the</strong>re is a barrier to prevent falls.Manifestation, preferably in etched glass, to be used wherever <strong>the</strong>re is a risk <strong>of</strong> collision<strong>of</strong> persons or where modesty may be compromised.If ro<strong>of</strong> skylights are to be used <strong>the</strong>y should be non-fragile. If <strong>the</strong> ro<strong>of</strong> requires routineaccess and <strong>the</strong>y are within 2.5m <strong>of</strong> a demarked route <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong>y should also be guarded(e.g. by handrails).4.13 Extension to Existing <strong>Buildings</strong>When a design incorporates or introduces a lower level building constructed against <strong>the</strong>side <strong>of</strong> a taller structure, access problems may be introduced to <strong>the</strong> façade <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> tallerbuilding.If access is likely to be needed to <strong>the</strong> higher element/elevation (e.g. window/guttercleaning) a detailed design risk evaluation should be produced to consider how accesswill be safely achieved.4.14 Delivery YardsAdequate provision is to be made to allow safe and efficient delivery and access inrelation to <strong>the</strong> function and requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building.4.15 Fixtures and FittingsUWE buildings will require <strong>the</strong> following fixtures and fittings to be provided according touse and occupation levels:• ‘Toprail’ flexible wall furniture system in teaching rooms, <strong>of</strong>fices and specific corridorlocations (to solid or suitably rein<strong>for</strong>ced stud partition walls only).• Tea stations with sink, storage, microwave oven and fridge space (or integralmicrowave and fridge)• Integrated panel systems <strong>for</strong> concealing pipework, toilet cisterns etcSpecialist fixtures and fittings <strong>for</strong> science laboratories, computer laboratories, engineeringworkshops etc will be specified separately according to building/room use. However,designers are invited to bring <strong>the</strong>ir expertise <strong>for</strong>ward and suggest solutions. See also Part6: Specialist Installations.4.16 HandoverAt Practical Completion <strong>the</strong> designer should ensure that <strong>the</strong> minimum in<strong>for</strong>mation detailedwithin <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Handover Report are issued to <strong>the</strong> Facilities CA <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> project. Allin<strong>for</strong>mation issued should be a duplication <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> in<strong>for</strong>mation contained within <strong>the</strong> projectO&M manuals.Prior to handover <strong>the</strong> designer should organise <strong>for</strong> a technical walk-round <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> projectarea <strong>for</strong> UWE Facilities staff and maintenance contractors <strong>for</strong> building familiarisation. Dateto be included in commissioning programme provided by commissioning contractor.Part 4 | B uilding & Civil Engineering9 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>4.17 Post-Occupancy AssessmentMajor Projects will be subject to a Post-Occupancy Assessment. It shall be coordinatedby <strong>the</strong> Lead <strong>Design</strong>er in association with <strong>the</strong> Estates CA, adopting <strong>the</strong> methodologydeveloped by Hefce <strong>Guide</strong> to Post Occupancy Evaluation.http://www.aude.ac.uk/info-centre/goodpractice/AUDE_POE_guideSummer Works and Minor projects will be subject to a Post-Occupancy Assessmentbased upon UWE’s Standard Client Feedback Matrix Questionnaire and will be carriedout 12 months after practical completion by <strong>the</strong> Contract Administrator.Part 4 | B uilding & Civil Engineering10 | P age


UWE Facilities<strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>R BlockPart 5M&E Requirements


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>IndexPart 1Part 2Part 3Part 4IntroductionSpace StandardsGeneral <strong>Design</strong>BC&E RequirementsPart 5 Mechanical & Electrical Requirements1.0 General <strong>Design</strong> Principles1.1 General1.2 Facilities Management/Maintenance1.3 Sustainability1.4 Occupancy2.0 Mechanical <strong>Design</strong> Criteria2.1 Mechanical <strong>Design</strong> Standards2.2 Statutory Requirements2.3 Heating Season2.4 Cooling Season2.5 Humidity Levels2.6 Cooling and Summer Temperatures2.7 Infiltration2.8 Ventilation2.9 Noise Levels - Acoustics3.0 Mechanical Conceptual <strong>Design</strong> (to RIBA Stage C)3.1 General3.2 Initial Load Assessment3.3 Plant Selection3.4 Plant Space/Location3.5 Services Distribution3.6 Whole Life Costing4.0 Documents to be issued by designers/external consultants4.1 General4.2 Conceptual <strong>Design</strong> Confirmation (CDC), RIBA Stage C4.3 Tender Issue, RIBA Stage E4.4 Handover, Stage L5.0 Mechanical System Selection and Configuration5.1 General5.2 Heating5.3 Mechanical Ventilation5.4 Cooling5.5 Pumped Circuits5.6 Pipework DistributionIndex


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>5.7 Central Plant5.8 Hot Water Services5.9 Cold Water Services5.10 Foul Drainage above Ground5.11 Utilities5.12 Building Management System (BMS)5.13 O<strong>the</strong>r Systems6.0 Schedule <strong>of</strong> Statutory Notifiable Plant7.0 Register <strong>of</strong> Approved Mechanical Suppliers7.1 Heating Plant7.2 Cooling Plant7.3 Ventilation Plant7.4 Pumps/Pressurisation Units7.5 Building Management System7.6 Water Generators8.0 Register <strong>of</strong> Approved Mechanical Contractors9.0 Water Treatment10.0 Commissioning - Mechanical11.0 Electrical <strong>Design</strong> Principles11.1 Electrical <strong>Design</strong> Standards11.2 Statutory Requirements12.0 Electrical <strong>Design</strong> Criteria12.1 Lighting Levels and Limiting Glare Indexes12.2 Electrical Load and Lighting Calculations13.0 Electrical Conceptual <strong>Design</strong>13.1 General13.2 Initial Equipment Space Assessment13.3 Equipment Selection13.4 Equipment Location14.0 Documents to be Issued by <strong>Design</strong>ers/External Consultants14.1 General14.2 Conceptual <strong>Design</strong> Confirmation (CDC), Stage C14.3 Tender Issue, Stage G14.4 Handover, Stage L15.0 System Selection and Configuration15.1 General15.2 Lighting15.3 Emergency Lighting15.4 External Lighting15.5 HV Switchgear15.6 Modular Switch Boards15.7 Metering15.8 Modular Panel Boards15.9 LV Distribution BoardsIndex


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>15.10 Transient over Voltage Protection15.11 Power Factor Correction15.12 Harmonic Filters15.13 Fire Alarm System15.13.1 General15.13.2 Fire Alarm System Cabling15.13.3 Fire Alarm System / Mechanical Systems Interface15.13.4 Fire Alarm System / Access Control Systems Interface15.14 Containment15.15 Lightning Protection15.16 Transient Voltage Surge Suppression and Protection15.17 UPS Systems15.18 Assistance Call Systems15.19 Small Power Services15.20 Under Floor Bus-Bar System15.21 Studios and Workshops15.22 Laboratories15.23 Electrical Supplies to Mechanical Plant15.24 Electrical Wall Clocks15.25 Electrical Hand Dryers15.26 Hearing Assistance Systems15.27 Labelling System15.28 Lifts15.29 CCTV, Security Alarm, Access Control and Car Park Barrier Systems15.30 Utilities15.31 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting16.0 Approved Suppliers17.0 Register <strong>of</strong> Approved Electrical Contractors18.0 Commissioning - Electrical19.0 Handover20.0 Post Occupancy Assessment21.0 Appendices:21.1 Mechanical AppendicesAConceptual <strong>Design</strong> Confirmation (CDC), Stage C Pro<strong>for</strong>maBTender Issue, Stage E Pro<strong>for</strong>ma21.2 Electrical AppendicesCConceptual <strong>Design</strong> Confirmation (CDC), Stage C Pro<strong>for</strong>maDTender Issue, Stage E Pro<strong>for</strong>ma21.3 M&E AppendicesEHandover, RIBA Stage LPart 6Part 7Specialist InstallationsWayfindingIndex


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>General <strong>Design</strong> Principles1.1 GeneralThe entire mechanical and electrical building services design, installation andcommissioning must be in full accordance with <strong>the</strong> documents/standards and statutoryrequirements detailed within this document.As with any existing site/building <strong>the</strong> designer will be required to visit site to survey <strong>the</strong>existing services and ascertain <strong>the</strong> implications <strong>of</strong> any new works. A condition survey maybe required <strong>for</strong> works within existing areas.The designer is advised that a significant amount <strong>of</strong> record documentation is available <strong>for</strong>use to assist <strong>the</strong>ir site survey and ultimate designs. Various O & M manuals, as fitteddrawings and survey drawings are held in <strong>the</strong> Facilities Office archive which can be madeavailable <strong>for</strong> viewing. The designer is fur<strong>the</strong>r advised that although significant, <strong>the</strong>se are byno means comprehensive, nor indeed do <strong>the</strong>y cover all areas. Where available <strong>the</strong>y mustbe verified on site by <strong>the</strong> designer. It is re-emphasized <strong>the</strong> designer must check <strong>the</strong>accuracy <strong>of</strong> any record in<strong>for</strong>mation that is used in <strong>the</strong> preparation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir design.For every project appointed, <strong>the</strong> designer will be expected to attend a series <strong>of</strong> coordinationmeetings with <strong>the</strong> client or building user to establish <strong>the</strong> exact building and mechanicalservices requirements to ensure <strong>the</strong> completed installation complies with client.Where necessary, designers will also be required to attend meetings with maintenancepersonnel/companies in order to discuss <strong>the</strong> implications <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir design on <strong>the</strong>maintenance strategy.Room Data Sheets must be completed <strong>for</strong> each room <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> project, <strong>the</strong> lead consultantshall be responsible <strong>for</strong> initialising and coordinating each room data sheet. These shall bebased, where available, upon <strong>the</strong> UWE standard room data sheets. These documents areto be supplemented upon discussion with <strong>the</strong> client and <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r consultants. Thedocuments are to be maintained and kept up to date <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> length <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> contract.The designer will be required (under <strong>the</strong> management and coordination <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> FacilitiesRepresentative <strong>for</strong> each project) to liaise with several UWE departments. This will typicallyinclude, but not necessarily be limited to, <strong>the</strong> following departments:• IT & Telephone Services• Security• Safety UnitThe specific Form <strong>of</strong> Tender / Preliminaries etc. will be advised by <strong>the</strong> Facilities CA on anindividual project basis.All Statutory Instruments and Acts must be complied with in full.The overriding design ethos should be:‘<strong>Design</strong> to minimise cost, but with emphasis on value <strong>for</strong> money and energy efficiencyra<strong>the</strong>r than economy’. Total ownership costs and consideration <strong>of</strong> whole-life costsshould be made through-out <strong>the</strong> project’s design and construction stages. In addition,designs should be efficient and safe to maintain.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical1 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>1.2 Facilities Management/MaintenanceIncluded within <strong>the</strong> tender documents shall be a clause to provide 12 months maintenance<strong>of</strong> all systems after practical completion. This maintenance should include <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> supplyand replacement <strong>of</strong> all consumable parts such as filters etc. The maintenance tasksper<strong>for</strong>med must be in accordance with all manufactures recommendations and <strong>the</strong> finalO&M manuals.The designer must ensure that <strong>the</strong> O & M manuals <strong>for</strong> each project are annotated toindicate which pages, notes, tables and diagrams are relevant to <strong>the</strong> plant installed. Allirrelevant data should be removed or where not practical marked clearly as ‘not relevant’.Adequate space <strong>for</strong> maintenance should be provided around all plant (to manufacture’srequirements). All plant and maintainable components must be installed in accessiblepositions that will not expose maintenance staff to undue risk.Defence Works Functional Standard, <strong>Design</strong> & Maintenance <strong>Guide</strong> 08: Spacerequirements <strong>for</strong> plant access, operation and maintenance; shall be used to determineaccess and maintenance space requirements, this is particular important within plantrooms.Consideration <strong>of</strong> whole-life costs should be made during <strong>the</strong> design process.Escape routes within plant rooms/ areas must be well defined and kept clear at all times.Where necessary, <strong>the</strong>re should be a second means <strong>of</strong> escape provided.Amongst <strong>the</strong> problems previously encountered at UWE are:• <strong>Design</strong>s which impose a need to work at height in stairwells or frequent access above<strong>the</strong> tiered or pitched seating <strong>of</strong> a lecture <strong>the</strong>atre• Requirement <strong>for</strong> access to high level valves, gauges etc. with no provision <strong>for</strong> suchaccess• <strong>Design</strong>s which <strong>for</strong>ce UWE to deconstruct bulkheads, cladding, casing etc. to permitaccess to valves, gauges, flanges etc.• <strong>Design</strong>s which place equipment in locations that require scaffolding to be built toprovide access (which must be avoided if alternative methods are reasonablypracticable) or <strong>for</strong>ce operatives to work close to unguarded edges• Ductwork/pipes crossing plant room floors, creating trip hazards and leading todamage as employees step on <strong>the</strong> duct work/pipes• Low level ducts/uni-strut, etc. creating a risk <strong>of</strong> head injury or abrasion injury• Risers which employees could or need to enter but which lack a load bearing floor• No or inadequate fire stopping details• <strong>Design</strong>s which require maintenance personnel to enter ducts/crawlspaces etc. UWEnow requires that <strong>the</strong>se designs are accompanied by a detailed risk evaluation toexplain why this is necessary and to propose a suitable management strategy. IfFacilities agree to <strong>the</strong> design <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> size and design <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> ducts/risers must complywith BS 8313.• <strong>Design</strong>s which impose a need <strong>for</strong> confined space entry, as defined under <strong>the</strong> ConfinedSpaces Regulations (which must be avoided if alternative methods are reasonablypracticable). A detailed risk evaluation and management strategy <strong>for</strong> entry shouldaccompany such designs.• Items <strong>of</strong> mechanical installations lacking details <strong>of</strong> weights, lifting points etc. leading todelays and complications during replacement/removal• Limited consideration to <strong>the</strong> installation and removal <strong>of</strong> mechanical equipment, e.g.ensuring that <strong>the</strong>re is sufficient space to operate lifting equipment. <strong>Design</strong> teamsPart 5 | M echanical & Electrical2 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>must co-ordinate to ensure that plant can be constructed and replaced (e.g.co-ordinate <strong>the</strong> positioning <strong>of</strong> lifting beams, sacrificial cladding panels etc.) and thatexternal areas are available to load and transport equipment to/from building.• Handover documentation has historically not contained details <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> managementstrategy if plant/equipment removal/replacement would require <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> cranes,lifting beams, sacrificial panels etc. <strong>of</strong> any o<strong>the</strong>r activity that might pose operationaldifficulties or a significant risk to contractors or UWE staff, students or assets.Maintenance to be included:• Large and specialist installations (Chillers, lifts, fire alarm?)• Maintenance essential to <strong>the</strong> correct operation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> installation/plant (filter changes,lubrication, safety checks etc.)• Maintenance to comply with equipment guarantees• Maintenance to comply with statutory requirementsFull details <strong>of</strong> contractor proposals (i.e. plant schedule, tasks and frequencies) to beprovided at <strong>the</strong> same juncture as <strong>the</strong> commissioning programme. The Estatesmanagement <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> above (including <strong>the</strong> DLP maintenance) shall be per<strong>for</strong>med by <strong>the</strong>Allotted Estates project Manager (assisted by <strong>the</strong> Estates maintenance team specialists),or alternatively <strong>the</strong> above parties but in reverse roles.Payment <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> maintenance shall be an identified sum at tender with programmedreleased at end <strong>of</strong> DLP.Maintenance to be excluded:• Emergency, health & safety or business critical installation or plant failures to <strong>the</strong>clients discretion, examples being, leaking pipes in critical areas, unsafe installations,incorrect operation <strong>of</strong> plant likely to effect <strong>the</strong> business <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> university. In such cases<strong>the</strong> university will employ 3 rd -party assistance to take immediate but limited actionsupon which <strong>the</strong> contractor will be contractually obliged to attend site within areasonable period to provide corrective actions or replacement <strong>of</strong> plant to <strong>the</strong>satisfaction <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> CA.In such cases <strong>the</strong> contractor will be in<strong>for</strong>med <strong>of</strong> any 3 -party intervention as soon as isreasonably practical by <strong>the</strong> university.1.3 SustainabilityThroughout <strong>the</strong> project, <strong>the</strong> services designer should considerenvironmental and sustainability issues when designing andspecifying <strong>the</strong> electrical and mechanical services as specified inGeneral <strong>Design</strong>, Part 3, Section 3.6.• As a guide, reference should be made to <strong>the</strong> following:– BREEAM assessment method– BRE Green <strong>Guide</strong> to Specification– Building Regulations Part L2A and L2B <strong>for</strong> new buildingsand existing buildings respectively• This process shall consider <strong>the</strong> various stages:– Initial Procurement (i.e. Country <strong>of</strong> origin)– Future energy costs/availability– Maintenance:rdPart 5 | M echanical & Electrical3 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>– Specialist / Non-specialist– Distance <strong>of</strong> travel (maintenance staff / spare parts)– Final Disposal:– Recycle / Re-use.• This process shall include consideration <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> following issues:– Energy conservation– Embodied energy– Use <strong>of</strong> renewable energy sources– Building emissions– Water conservation– Material selection1.4 Occupancy• Normal occupational hours:– 08:00 – 18:00pm: <strong>of</strong>fice space– 08:30 – 18:00pm: teaching– 07.00 – 22.30pm: sports– 24 hr: as specified <strong>for</strong> teaching/IT areas– 24 hr: student accommodation2.0 Mechanical <strong>Design</strong> Criteria2.1 Mechanical <strong>Design</strong> Standards• CIBSE - <strong>Guide</strong>s; Commissioning Codes; Technical Memoranda; Building EnergyCodes; Lighting <strong>Guide</strong>s; Application Manuals;• IOP - Plumbing Engineering Services <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>• BSRIA - Technical Publications• Loss Prevention Council - Rules <strong>for</strong> Automatic Sprinkler Installations• BS 7671 Requirements <strong>for</strong> Electrical Installations (IEE Wiring Regulations)• British Standards & Codes <strong>of</strong> Practices/European Standards (BS/EN).• Statutory Acts, Regulations and associated legislation..• Department <strong>of</strong> Education & Skills Building Bulletins• UWE Standard Mechanical & Electrical Specifications.• Best Practice.The designer shall in<strong>for</strong>m and advise UWE <strong>of</strong> any conflict between <strong>the</strong> above, and seekUWE approval <strong>of</strong> proposed resolution2.2 Statutory Requirements• Health and Safety at Work Act and all associated regulations, including <strong>the</strong>ir approvedcodes <strong>of</strong> practice and guidance. In particular, designs must comply with <strong>the</strong> Workplace(Health, Safety and Welfare) Regulations and designers must discharge <strong>the</strong>ir dutiesunder <strong>the</strong> Construction (<strong>Design</strong> and Management) Regulations.• The Water Supply (water fittings) Regulations.• The Gas Safety (Installation & Use) Regulations.• Current UK Building Regulations.• Legionnaires Disease. The control <strong>of</strong> Legionella bacteria in Water Systems. ACoP(L8).• Pressurised Systems Safety Regulations.• Pressure Systems and Transportable Gas Containers Regulations.• Local Building Control / Environmental Health Office requirements.• All applicable and relevant Statutory Instruments.• Planning e.g. flue heights, fuel bunkers, tanks• Environment Agency e.g. Pumping stations, condensate run-<strong>of</strong>f.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical4 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>2.3 Heating Season (air temperature)Winter ambient: - 5.5°C db/100% RHRoom temp (general): 22°C db(See CIBSE guide, table A1.3 <strong>for</strong> specific areas)100% outside air ventilation ambient: -7.0°C db/100% RHAllowances <strong>for</strong> intermittent heating: (See CIBSE guide, table A9.9).2.4 Heating Cooling Season (air temperature)Summer ambient: 28°C db/20°C wbSummer ambient (heat-rejection plant): 30°C db/21°C wbRoom temp (general): 22°C db/(See CIBSE guide, table A1.3 <strong>for</strong> specific areas)(note, <strong>the</strong>se are only applicable where <strong>the</strong> case <strong>for</strong> mechanical cooling has been acceptedby Facilities, see 2.6 below).2.5 Humidity LevelsUnless specifically specified Humidity levels shall be maintained between <strong>the</strong> high and lowlevel CIBSE recommendations.2.6 Cooling and Summer TemperaturesThe European Energy Per<strong>for</strong>mance <strong>of</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong> Directive Article 9,in conjunction with <strong>the</strong> UK Building regulations Part L has imposedstrict limits on <strong>for</strong>ced cooling. Forced refrigerative cooling shall onlybe considered once all o<strong>the</strong>r means <strong>of</strong> achieving <strong>the</strong> requiredconditions have been exhausted.To avoid <strong>the</strong> need <strong>for</strong> cooling systems <strong>the</strong> following principles shouldbe considered and adopted as appropriate:Heat releasing equipment should be sited in areas with openablewindows, free natural ventilation or naturally cool areas e.g.basements etc.A large population <strong>of</strong> heat releasing equipment should not beinstalled in a single area or in areas where <strong>the</strong>re are large occupancylevels.Only <strong>the</strong> necessary quantity <strong>of</strong> machines/equipment should be installed.Local exhaust ventilation systems used to remove heat from source wherever possibleIn areas not com<strong>for</strong>t cooled <strong>the</strong> Building Regulations Approved document L2 per<strong>for</strong>mancestandard, <strong>for</strong> avoidance <strong>of</strong> summertime overheating <strong>for</strong> learning and teaching areas shallbe adopted.The above refers to com<strong>for</strong>t cooling only. When <strong>the</strong> function <strong>of</strong> an area requires specificoperating conditions i.e. processes, specialist equipment, chemical storage etc. <strong>the</strong>n suchareas will be assessed independently. If it is concluded that cooling or air conditioning isnecessary <strong>the</strong>n Local Exhaust Ventilation systems used to remove heat from sourcewherever possible.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical5 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>External Shading should be considered in conjunction with <strong>the</strong> building designer toconsider <strong>the</strong> full implications including minimising <strong>the</strong> effects <strong>of</strong> unwanted heat gain tooccupied space. This should be done from building conception.Passive ventilation strategies should be assessed to minimize energy usage.Re-use <strong>of</strong> low grade heat, such as heat rejection from chiller plant should be fullyconsidered both with respect to <strong>the</strong> building under design and/or buildings in <strong>the</strong> vicinity.2.7 InfiltrationThe effects <strong>of</strong> air infiltration and exfiltration shall be allowed <strong>for</strong> within <strong>the</strong> building <strong>the</strong>rmalloads.2.8 VentilationRefer to Part F <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Building Regulations and <strong>the</strong> Building Bulletins <strong>for</strong> ventilation rates.Where mechanical ventilation is required, heat recovery should always be assessed.2.9 AcousticsPlease also refer to section 3 <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>Noise from building services should not exceed <strong>the</strong> noise rating (NR) values listed below.This includes noise from <strong>the</strong> normal operation <strong>of</strong> heating, ventilation and air conditioningplant. Higher levels may be permissible during purge ventilation. When planning ventilationduct runs, <strong>the</strong>y should as far as possible avoid crossing partition walls, and where this isinevitable a crosstalk silencer must be incorporated so that <strong>the</strong> sound insulationrequirements listed in section 3.6 are met.<strong>Design</strong>s should aim to ensure that plantrooms operate at 78db or less. If sound pressurelevel is between 79db-82db <strong>the</strong>n a warning sign should be installed on <strong>the</strong> door stating tha<strong>the</strong>aring protection should be worn if individuals are in <strong>the</strong> room <strong>for</strong> more than half a day. Inaddition, visual and auditory fire alarms should be installed. If sound pressure will exceed82db <strong>the</strong>n a detailed risk evaluation is required to provide details <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> requiredmanagement strategy. Plant rooms must not operate at 88db or above.Type(s) <strong>of</strong> roomMaximumvalue <strong>of</strong> TmfAcademic staff and admin <strong>of</strong>fices NR 35Cafeterias, c<strong>of</strong>fee bars etc NR 40Class rooms, lecture rooms, seminar rooms and tutorial rooms Audio NR 30visual and video conference rooms Language laboratoriesDrama studios, music practice rooms NR 30Entrance halls, corridors, stairwells, atria and circulation spaces NR 40Halls and rooms <strong>for</strong> music drama and o<strong>the</strong>r live per<strong>for</strong>mances NR 30Large lecture <strong>the</strong>atres and flagship conference rooms NR 30Lecture <strong>the</strong>atres up to 100 seats NR 30Library circulation and media storage areas NR 35Library study areas NR 30Recording studios NR 30Rooms intended <strong>for</strong> clinical examination and treatment, confidential NR 35Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical6 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>interviews, psycho<strong>the</strong>rapy, speech <strong>the</strong>rapy etc.Science laboratories, art and design studios, graphics workshops NR 30Sports halls and gymnasia NR 35Swimming pools NR 50Workshops NR 353.0 Mechanical Conceptual <strong>Design</strong> (to RIBA Stage C)3.1 GeneralClient needs assessed through structured client liaison meetings.Site investigation / surveys per<strong>for</strong>med.UWE Facilities guidance sought.Consideration and review <strong>of</strong> case studies and technical papers <strong>of</strong> similar applications.Consider and reflect budgetary and energy conservation requirements.3.2 Initial Load AssessmentThis is required <strong>for</strong> early assessment <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> plants space requirements <strong>for</strong> co-ordinationwith <strong>the</strong> building designer.BSRIA documents and Institutes/CIBSE rules <strong>of</strong> thumb can be used as a check.3.3 Plant and System SelectionSelected to maximize operational efficiency and availability.To suit ambient conditions (<strong>the</strong>rmal & noise) during all seasons.Continuity with existing plant and manufacturers where appropriate.Consideration <strong>of</strong> maintainability and <strong>the</strong> minimalisation <strong>of</strong> impact within occupied spaces.3.4 Plant Space/LocationWhenever possible external plant should be located at ground level within a securecompound. Guidance on ro<strong>of</strong>-mounted plant is given elsewhere.Defence Works Functional Standard, <strong>Design</strong> & Maintenance <strong>Guide</strong> 08: Spacerequirements <strong>for</strong> plant access, operation and maintenance; shall be used to determineaccess and maintenance space requirements, this is particular important within plantrooms.Take into account plant’s technical requirements and environmental/local ambientconditions & visual aspects.Allowance <strong>for</strong> future expansion.Access should be via communal areas ra<strong>the</strong>r than occupied spaces.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical7 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>3.5 Services DistributionAll services should be installed to allow safe future access.Use <strong>of</strong> reverse-return pipework configuration is preferred where practical and cost effective.3.6 Whole Life Costing4.1 GeneralPreparation <strong>of</strong> Whole Life Costings as BREEAM requirements and section 1.6DOCUMENTS TO BE ISSUED BY DESIGNER / EXTERNAL CONSULTANTSParagraphs 4.2 & 4.3 schedule <strong>the</strong> 3 no. reports that will be required to be provided by <strong>the</strong>designer up to stage E <strong>for</strong> each project. (For <strong>the</strong> handover requirements refer to <strong>the</strong>separate section <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> design guide). These will generally be in <strong>the</strong> <strong>for</strong>m <strong>of</strong>multi-disciplined reports coordinated with all members <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> design team, issued by <strong>the</strong>lead consultant. They should be issued to <strong>the</strong> Facilities CA or Engineer to an agreedprogramme.4.2 Conceptual <strong>Design</strong> Confirmation (CDC), Stage RIBA CThis document is required <strong>for</strong> <strong>University</strong> audit purposes and to ensure that all clientrequirements have been met, with <strong>the</strong> design <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e being suitable <strong>for</strong> development totender stage. It will also be used as a final check against funds allocated <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> project (seepro<strong>for</strong>ma Appendix A).4.3 Tender Issue, Stage RIBA EThis is in essence confirmation <strong>of</strong> any changes to <strong>the</strong> CDC plus additions detailing amongsto<strong>the</strong>rs; copy <strong>of</strong> all calculations, details <strong>of</strong> statutory notifiable plant and final budget check,(see pro<strong>for</strong>ma in Appendix B).4.4 Handover, RIBA Stage LThis is in essence, a confirmation <strong>of</strong> any changes to <strong>the</strong> Stage G requirements, andconfirmation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> original design intent, plus amendments to incorporate essentialin<strong>for</strong>mation (<strong>for</strong> occupiers and future maintenance) such as details <strong>of</strong> critical testdocumentation, in<strong>for</strong>mation required at handover should be considered pre-contract andcollated in <strong>the</strong> prescribed UWE <strong>for</strong>mat (See pro<strong>for</strong>ma in Appendix E).5.0 Mechanical System Selection & Configurations/Specific UWE TechnicalRequirements5.1 GeneralThe mechanical designer’s duties include <strong>the</strong> analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building’s façade inconjunction with <strong>the</strong> building designer and structural engineer to assess <strong>the</strong>rmalper<strong>for</strong>mance and ultimately to increase energy efficiency.Consideration at an early stage should be given to future services requirements.The mechanical services designer must liaise with all members <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> design teamincluding <strong>the</strong> building designer and structural engineer to provide an integrated building/Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical8 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>5.2 Heatingstructural / services installation. This must include coordination <strong>of</strong> mechanical buildersworkrequirements, plant space and significant apertures within <strong>the</strong> structure.• Coordination is also required with <strong>the</strong> electrical services designer regarding <strong>the</strong> powerand control requirements <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> mechanical services.• UWE contains a number <strong>of</strong> areas where access is restricted due to hazardousprocesses e.g. laboratories. Any isolation valves etc. should be located outside <strong>of</strong><strong>the</strong>se areas so that, in an emergency, supplies can be shut <strong>of</strong>f without exposingworkers to risk.Heat source: An assessment <strong>of</strong> low/zero carbon heating sources should be conductedprior to specifying standard fossil fuel boilers.Spare capacity: A minimum <strong>of</strong> two heat sources must be installed: 150% total nominalcapacity.Three or more heat sources: 120% total nominal capacityHeat source safety: Hard-wired high temp. cut-out.Suitably rated safety valvesHeat source control: As HM Government: Non-domestic Building Services Compliance<strong>Guide</strong>Pumped circuits: Each pumped circuit must have dual pumps (i.e. run and standby).Pumps should be specified with variable speed drives.<strong>Design</strong> Margin: A minimum <strong>of</strong> +10% <strong>of</strong> heat out-put should be added to all terminal/(heatemitting) devices. Adequate allowance <strong>for</strong> heat loss from distribution pipework should bemade.Electrical Heater Batteries: These must not be used without prior agreement with <strong>the</strong>Facilities CA.Use <strong>of</strong> storage tanks: If storage tanks are to be used <strong>for</strong> providing heating fuel (e.g.bio-fuel), tanks should be fitted with a fill indicator which is to be clearly visible at <strong>the</strong> fillingpoint and <strong>the</strong> tank should also be fitted with an overfill alarm, linked to <strong>the</strong> BMS. Securefilling point to be located on accessible external wall. Tanks are to be double bunded.Handover documentation must contain details <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> refilling strategy (including requiredtraffic management controls etc.)Zoning: Appropriate heat zoning should be defined to maximise system efficiency.5.3 Mechanical VentilationDucted supply ventilation: Major supply AHU’s (above 0.5m3/s) should have <strong>the</strong>following:• Pre filter: panel to EU3• Main filter: Bar to EU6• (With Magnahelic across both)Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical9 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>5.4 CoolingFacility <strong>for</strong> recirculation <strong>of</strong> air where possible via motorised dampers. Where full fresh air isessential, o<strong>the</strong>r methods <strong>of</strong> heat recovery shall be evaluated.Automated windows: Where installed, <strong>the</strong>y should be complete with position indication orwindow contacts.Toilet extract: Ducted systems should have run & standby fans with auto-changeover andBMS common alarm.Variable speed drives: The use <strong>of</strong> variable speed drives should be assessed to maximise<strong>the</strong> efficiency <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> system.Direct drives: Fan power should be <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> direct drive type as opposed to belt drive.Smoke extract: Should be provided as agreed with Building Control /Fire Officer.Fire damper type: Should be specified and installed <strong>for</strong> ease <strong>of</strong> annual testing bymaintenance staff. The mechanical designer should make provision to witness <strong>the</strong>operation <strong>of</strong> all fire dampers as part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir witnessing <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> commissioning process.Lift shaft smoke ventilation and LMR ventilation: Should be in accordance withBS5655.DW144: All installations should be designed and installed in accordance with this and o<strong>the</strong>rrelevant DW standards.Displacement Ventilation: Use <strong>of</strong> this principle is preferred where practical and costeffective.Intake and discharge locations: These should be considered at an early stage in <strong>the</strong>project whilst applying good design principles and CIBSE guide B recommendations.Consideration <strong>of</strong> discharge and intake pollution must also be considered. External wea<strong>the</strong>rlouvers should be selected and specified by <strong>the</strong> mechanical services designer.Ducted supply & extract fans: Differential Pressure Switches (DPSs) should be mountedacross all fans.VAV supply & extract fans: These should have differential pressure sensors ra<strong>the</strong>r thanswitches.Humidification: Use <strong>of</strong> humidifiers is not generally accepted but use <strong>of</strong> central plant <strong>for</strong>dehumidification is.GeneralThe emphasis <strong>of</strong> good design must always be on minimising internal summertimetemperatures. This should be approached in two stages. Stage 1 should evaluate <strong>the</strong>suitability <strong>of</strong> natural or mechanical ventilation. If during this preliminary period it becomesapparent that suitable conditions will not be achieved with natural ventilation, <strong>the</strong>n Stage 2should be to investigate <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> mechanical cooling (see clause 2.4 <strong>of</strong> this design guide).The use <strong>of</strong> Mechanical Cooling is to be avoided, where it can’t be avoided approval <strong>for</strong> itsuse should be sought <strong>for</strong> Client, <strong>the</strong> system shall also comply with <strong>the</strong> following:Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical10 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Small-scale• Local DX Cooling• Heat pump – The use <strong>of</strong> reverse cycle heat pump is to be evaluated.• Ducted Fresh Air via Fresh Air spigot to external• BMS / controls Requirement: Remote Start/stop– Common alarm– Room temp sensor– Auto-restart upon power reinstatementThe mechanical designer should ensure <strong>the</strong> details <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> amount <strong>of</strong> refrigerant used andsource <strong>of</strong> power supply is provided on a trafolyte label screwed to <strong>the</strong> condensing unit.Large-scale• Cooling towers or o<strong>the</strong>r spray units will not be accepted.• Number <strong>of</strong> chillers: A minimum <strong>of</strong> 2 chillers should normally be installed: nominalSystem total nominal capacity: 125%.• Chillers must have dual safety valve configuration to minimise loss <strong>of</strong> refrigerant duringmaintenance procedures.<strong>Design</strong> MarginA minimum <strong>of</strong> +10% <strong>of</strong> cooling out-put should be added to all terminal devices.Adequate allowance <strong>for</strong> heat gain from distribution pipework should be made.5.5 Pumped CircuitsShould have at least 100% standby (excluding HWS secondary, where a spare pump shallbe provided).+10% to be added to all pump duties (head & flow) to make allowance <strong>for</strong> commissioningtolerances.In <strong>the</strong> first instance variable volume pumps with static pressure control via <strong>the</strong> BMS shouldbe considered. This is also important when future expansion <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> installation is envisaged.Variable speed drives should utilised where possible and have differential pressure sensorsra<strong>the</strong>r than switches.Local visual indication via temperature and pressure gauges should be provided in additionto BMS sensors (BMS sensors alone are insufficient).5.6 Distribution ServicesDistribution pipework should generally be to match <strong>the</strong> existing installation.Pipework installed in exposed or vulnerable areas should be steel.The use <strong>of</strong> plastic pipework is generally not encouraged (excluding overflows and warningpipes etc.).All water services pipework must not be routed in locations (distribution boards, MCC’s etc.)where it is possible a leak could cause a health and safety hazard.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical11 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Flexible pipework final connections to fan coil units are acceptable providing <strong>the</strong>y complywith relevant HEVAC standards.Adequate allowance <strong>for</strong> system expansion should be made in pipework design ra<strong>the</strong>r thanuse <strong>of</strong> expansion bellows.Services <strong>for</strong> open plan accommodations should be designed on a grid basis.ALL new plant and pipework/ductwork jointing gaskets must be asbestos-free withconfirmation plastic tags (which extend beyond adjacent joints <strong>for</strong> ease <strong>of</strong> futureidentification).Unless identified as indicated above, ALL existing gaskets should be assumed to containasbestos. There<strong>for</strong>e, if <strong>the</strong>y are to be exposed or removed during <strong>the</strong> contract works <strong>the</strong>ymust be treated as hazardous and dealt with in <strong>the</strong> appropriate manner.All motorised dampers and valves should have <strong>the</strong>ir ‘open’ and ‘closed’ positions clearlymarked on <strong>the</strong> side <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir respective actuators prior to handover.Insulation should be provided to comply with current regulations.5.7 Central PlantCertificates <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> factory pressure testing <strong>of</strong> boilers, calorifiers and o<strong>the</strong>r pressure vesselsshould be specified at tender and provided at handover stage.Consideration <strong>of</strong> plant operation at part load should be made, with <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> fullymodulating plant preferred where considered economic.5.8 Hot Water ServicesAll methods <strong>of</strong> hot water production should be evaluated including solar, heat pumps,biomass etcAn assessment should be made <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> most efficient method <strong>of</strong> hot water production,including <strong>the</strong> separation <strong>of</strong> heating and hot water.Ra<strong>the</strong>r than LPHW/MPHW fed storage calorifiers, gas fired water heaters should be used<strong>for</strong> hot water service generation.Two pipe (Recirculatory) type systems only are acceptable. Guidance should be soughtfrom <strong>the</strong> Facilities CA\Engineer be<strong>for</strong>e installation <strong>of</strong> any o<strong>the</strong>r type.Central water generators should have a minimum <strong>of</strong> two generators to minimise down timeduring times <strong>of</strong> maintenance.Storage calorifiers should be selected and designed to be capable <strong>of</strong> raising cold waterfrom 10oC to 65°C, with a two hour recovery period.Calorifiers should have anti-stratification pump circuits which should be controlled to <strong>the</strong>dictates <strong>of</strong> document L8.All HWS should be stored at 60°C and warning labels provided at all outlets where <strong>the</strong>re isa risk <strong>of</strong> scalding.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical12 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Outlets within Disabled toilets and o<strong>the</strong>r areas with vulnerable occupants must havereduced temperature flow via <strong>the</strong>rmostatic mixing valves, specified as being suitable <strong>for</strong> thisapplication.5.9 Cold Water ServicesWater efficient systems should be installed to meet <strong>the</strong> required BREEAM rating.Where CWS storage is required it should have a minimum <strong>of</strong> two independent tanks(inter-connected in a ‘fill’ and ‘draw’ configuration) to minimise down time during times <strong>of</strong>maintenance.Tank supplies should serve all cold water outlets except those in kitchens, tea bays andvending areas where <strong>the</strong>y should be designated as drinking water and should be mains fed.To minimise <strong>the</strong> risk <strong>of</strong> water stagnation or bacteriological growth, storage capacity shouldbe commensurate with minimum storage rates.RPZ non-return valves should not be used without <strong>the</strong> approval <strong>of</strong> Facilities CA\Engineer.An assessment should be made <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> rain water and grey water harvestingsystems.5.10 Foul Drainage Above GroundVulca<strong>the</strong>ne pipework shall be used <strong>for</strong> chemical drainage including laboratories etcIn engineering/science work areas and laboratories, all drain runs must be labelled to show<strong>the</strong> source(s) <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> drain. If it is known that will carry hazardous or radioactivesubstances, <strong>the</strong> drains should be labelled accordinglyWaste traps/catch pots are to be labelled with appropriate warning signage and containedin locked and labelled cupboardsPlease find a list <strong>of</strong> ‘prescribed substances’ as given by <strong>the</strong> UWE sewerage provider. Thesesubstances cannot be put down <strong>the</strong> drain without notifying <strong>the</strong> sewerage provider, who <strong>the</strong>nneeds to notify <strong>the</strong> Environment Agency:• Mercury and its compounds• Cadmium and its compounds• Gamma-hexachlorocyclohexane• DDT• Pentachlorophenol and its compounds• Hexachlorobenzene• Hexachlorobutadiene• Aldrin• Dieldrin• Endrin• Carbon tetrachloride• Polychlorinated biphenyls• Dichlorvos• 1,2-dichloroethane• Trichlorobenzene• Atrazine• SimazinePart 5 | M echanical & Electrical13 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>5.11 Utilities• Tributyltin compounds• Triphenyltin compounds• Trifluralin• Fenitrothion• Azinphos-methyl• Malathion• Endosulfan• Trichloroethylene (above 30kg per year)• Perchloroethylene (above 30kg per year).The use <strong>of</strong> prescribed substances shall be avoided where possible, where <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> aprescribed product is proposed by a faculty <strong>the</strong> designer shall in<strong>for</strong>m and review <strong>the</strong> fullimplications with <strong>the</strong> design team and UWE faculties.All external underground pipework should be installed with braded marker tape installeddirectly over <strong>the</strong> crown <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> pipe <strong>for</strong> its entire length. This tape should be extended and<strong>the</strong>n terminated within suitable accessible points at ei<strong>the</strong>r end <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> pipe run (valvechambers & building entry points etc) to facilitate future tracing via signal generationmethod.The designer is responsible <strong>for</strong> checking <strong>the</strong> suitability <strong>of</strong> all existing supplies at projectinception.NJUG National Joint Utilities Group’s guidance should be used <strong>for</strong> installation <strong>of</strong>underground utilities.Underground services are to be marked and identified (in accordance with BS 1710)Gas installation line diagrams <strong>for</strong> new installations or amendments to existing must beprovided. They should be mounted on site plus a copy given to <strong>the</strong> Facilities CA athandover.Gas detection systems, linked to solenoid valves, should be provided within all new remoteboiler houses or those integral within <strong>the</strong> building and over 300KW.Where Gas solenoid valves are provided <strong>the</strong> system must be designed to ensure <strong>the</strong>y donot auto-open upon power re-instatement, plus control provision should be made such thatits power supply is not interrupted during <strong>the</strong> university’s regular fire alarm testing regime.Gas proving and Emergency Isolation Points should be provided in all laboratories andkitchens.Interlock <strong>of</strong> gas supply with supply air <strong>for</strong> all main kitchens is essential.Manhole covers must be suitable <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir location and UWE requires a detailed design riskevaluation if any manholes are to be placed within a structure. UWE encourages <strong>the</strong>placement <strong>of</strong> manholes away from high traffic areas to minimise risk during maintenance.Metering and sub metering <strong>of</strong> utilities shall be installed as per CIBSE guide TM39 andBREEAM requirements. All new meters should have a pulsed output that is connected to<strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong> Energy Team’s Elcomponant metering system as detailed in The <strong>Design</strong><strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> Builds, Part 3 General <strong>Design</strong> - 3.6.3.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical14 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>5.12 Building Management System (BMS)Schneider ‘SMART’ s<strong>of</strong>tware to be installed during <strong>the</strong> BMS commissioning stage (coveringall plant provided under <strong>the</strong> contract) with <strong>the</strong> objective <strong>of</strong> providing a ‘defect-free’installation at handover. Fur<strong>the</strong>rmore <strong>the</strong> contractor shall include <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> monitoring,analysis and defect rectification <strong>of</strong> all BMS components, and s<strong>of</strong>tware engineering <strong>of</strong> saidequipment through-out <strong>the</strong> entire defects liability period, culminating in a totally defect-freeBMS system at end <strong>of</strong> DLP.Provision should be made within <strong>the</strong> construction programme <strong>for</strong> client witnessing <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>BMS controls prior to handover.A copy <strong>of</strong> all BMS graphics, control philosophy and bespoke s<strong>of</strong>tware programming shouldbe issued to <strong>the</strong> Facilities CA\Engineer <strong>for</strong> approval, with sufficient time period (two weeks)<strong>for</strong> comment.All safety interlocks must be hardwired (i.e. temperature, pressure, airflow etc.) withindication only to be provided via <strong>the</strong> BMS where applicable.All plant’s MCCs must be linked to <strong>the</strong> sites fire alarm system, with a provision to over-ridethis link <strong>for</strong> regular fire alarm testing.As a rule <strong>of</strong> thumb, room sensors should be located 1.5M AFFL, 0.5M from corners andvertical protrusions, avoiding heat emissions and o<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong>rmal hot-spots. They must berepresentative on <strong>the</strong> space being controlled.Fridges and freezers that are considered business or research-critical must also beconnected to <strong>the</strong> BMS.5.13 O<strong>the</strong>r Systems:Fire Fighting:Fire fighting dry/wet risers must be designed, installed and commissioned in accordancewith BS5306.External hydrants must be designed, installed and commissioned in accordance withBS5306.All services must be fully coordinated with Building Control requirements (and Fire Officerrecommendations).The use <strong>of</strong> any fire suppressant gas is to be avoided and in particular FM200, if unavoidable<strong>the</strong> proposed gas and system to be used is to be agreed with facilitiesSpecialist services<strong>Design</strong>ers <strong>of</strong> faculty gas installations or specialist services (e.g. laboratory gases) mustco-ordinate <strong>the</strong>ir designs with <strong>the</strong> rest <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> design team, <strong>the</strong> faculty and vice versa, even ifthis installation is being procured as a separate package.6.0 Schedule <strong>of</strong> Statutory Notifiable Plant:The mechanical designer must consider <strong>the</strong> statutory requirements <strong>for</strong> all <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> followinginstallations and advise <strong>the</strong> Facilities CA\Engineer <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir project implications via <strong>the</strong>reporting process detailed within <strong>the</strong> appendices <strong>of</strong> this design guide:Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical15 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>• Legionella Risk Assessment, schedule <strong>of</strong> legionella susceptible plant.• Bristol Water, notifications.• Refrigerant plant (above 25kwbar), schedule <strong>of</strong> plant.• Boilers (above 100oC), schedule <strong>of</strong> plant.• Pressure vessels and MPHW calorifiers (heating, CHW, refrigerant or CWS), schedule<strong>of</strong> plant.• COSHH tests, schedule <strong>of</strong> plant.7.0 Register <strong>of</strong> Approved Mechanical Suppliers:7.1 Heating PlantBoilers up to 70 kwBoilers over 100 kwBurnersRadiatorsTRV’s7.2 Cooling PlantChillersDX/VRV7.3 Ventilation PlantAHU: Caradon/Ideal: Baxi: Potterton: Vaillant: Hamworthy: Hoval: Clyde Combustion: Wellman Robey: Riello: Nuway: Stelrad (or to match existing): Runtal / Hudevad in specifically agreed locations: Sampson Type M20 control head and <strong>the</strong>ft protection collar,complete with matching Lockshields M33.: Daikin: Carrier: Trane: Daikin: Mitsubishi: ABB Flatk: Dalair: Senior ModucelFans: ABB Flatk: Nuaire: Howden Group: EltaPart 5 | M echanical & Electrical16 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>7.4 Pumps/Pressurisation UnitsPumps: Armstrong/Holden Brooke/Pullen: Grundfos: Smedegaard7.5 Building Management SystemBMS: Schneider7.6 Water GeneratorsInstantaneous electric: Heatrae Sadia: SantonDirect gas fired: Lochinvar8.0 Register <strong>of</strong> Approved Mechanical ContractorsThe designer should advise and/or recommend to Facilities CA <strong>of</strong> suitable contractors.Facilities CA will make <strong>the</strong> final selection.9.0 Water TreatmentAll water systems must comply with <strong>the</strong> specifications contained in <strong>the</strong> UWE legionellapolicy.Any designs that deviate from this policy should be accompanied by a detailed riskevaluation.If water treatment will require <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> substances that are potentially hazardous, <strong>the</strong>nsuitable storage (e.g. bunded containers) and first aid facilities (e.g. eye wash station) mustbe provided.Drinking fountains are to be mains fed.Consideration <strong>of</strong> closed circuit dosing <strong>of</strong> new installationsCommissioning - Mechanical:The designer should ensure <strong>the</strong> system is fully commissionable (and self-balancing whereeconomically viable).Commissioning devices should be installed to manufacturer’s recommendations andaccessible <strong>for</strong> future use.CIBSE commissioning codes, BREEAM and BSRIA guides should be adhered to.10-15% <strong>of</strong> all values should be checked by <strong>the</strong> mechanical designer.100% <strong>of</strong> all safety interlocks (and all fire dampers’ operation) should be witnessed by <strong>the</strong>designer.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical17 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>10.0 Electrical <strong>Design</strong> Principles10.1 Electrical <strong>Design</strong> Standards:Latest editions and amendments <strong>of</strong>:Labs Under Construction• All relevant British Standards & Codes <strong>of</strong> Practice/European (BS/EN)• UWE Standard Mechanical & Electrical Specifications• CIBSE <strong>Guide</strong>s and Technical memorandums• BS7671:2001, IEE Wiring Regulations, Requirements <strong>for</strong> Electrical Installations.Specifications shall refer to <strong>the</strong> IEE Wiring Regulations as a minimum standard to beachieved and/or as supplementary requirements to detailed technical clauses whichrelate to a specific aspect <strong>of</strong> an installation.• In addition <strong>the</strong> electrical network shall comply with <strong>the</strong> Disability Legislation, BS 8300‘<strong>Design</strong> <strong>of</strong> buildings and <strong>the</strong>ir approaches to meet <strong>the</strong> needs <strong>of</strong> disabledpeople — Code <strong>of</strong> practice’ and all relevant UWE<strong>University</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>lines/Installation Specifications.(except where specifically different from this Electrical <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>, in which case in<strong>for</strong>m<strong>the</strong> Contract Administrator / Lead <strong>Design</strong>er and await authority to proceed from UWE)10.2 Statutory Requirements:• Health and Safety at Work etc Act, 1974• Electricity at Work Regulations, 1989• Construction (<strong>Design</strong> and Management) Regulations, 2007• The Building Regulations <strong>of</strong> <strong>England</strong> and Wales• Control <strong>of</strong> Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) Regulations. 2002• Control <strong>of</strong> Asbestos at Work Regulations, 2006• Management <strong>of</strong> Health and Safety at Work Regulations, 1999• All relevant and applicable Statutory InstrumentsPart 5 | M echanical & Electrical18 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>11.0 Electrical <strong>Design</strong> Criteria11.1 Lighting Levels and Limiting Glare Indexes:See CIBSE Lighting <strong>Guide</strong>s and Code <strong>for</strong> Lighting <strong>for</strong> additional recommendations and <strong>for</strong>areas that are not defined in <strong>the</strong> following schedule:MaintainedIlluminance(Lux)LimitingGlareIndexMinimumColourRendering (Ra)NotesOffice AreasSee CIBSE LG7General <strong>of</strong>fices 400 19 80 See CIBSE LG7Computer work stations 300 - 400 19 80 See CIBSE LG3Conference and meeting rooms 400 19 80 ControllableFiling, photocopying, etc 300 19 80 Vertical surfacesAcademic AreasSee CIBSE LG5Classrooms, lecture hall 500 19 80 ControllableArt rooms, rooms 750 19 90Colour temp>5000KPractical rooms and laboratories 500 19 80Handicraft rooms 500 19 80Demonstration tables 750 19 80 ControllableComputer labs 300 19 80 See CIBSE LG3General Building AreasCirculation areas, corridors Consult UWE EstatesEntrance halls 200 19 80Reception desks 250 - 350 22 80Stairwells 100 - 150 25 80Plant rooms 150 25 80 & portable lightElectrical switch rooms 200 25 80Store rooms 100 25 80Toilets 100 19 80External Areas12.2 Electrical Load and Lighting Calculations:See CIBSE LG6The appropriate load calculations shall be included <strong>for</strong> all design presented to <strong>the</strong> UWEEstates Department <strong>for</strong> comment and/or in<strong>for</strong>mation. <strong>Design</strong>ers are required to enter <strong>the</strong>appropriate values into a spreadsheet <strong>for</strong>mat.Lighting levels in lux, uni<strong>for</strong>mity, glare indexes along with energy targets and W/m 2 valuesto be submitted <strong>for</strong> each room/space.A target range <strong>of</strong> 10 to 12W/m2 shall be applied to <strong>the</strong> artificial lighting design. Areas thatfall outside <strong>the</strong>se parameters shall be highlighted to UWE Estates.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical19 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>13.0 Electrical Conceptual <strong>Design</strong> (To Stage C)13.1 General:• Client needs assessed through structured client liaison meetings• Site investigation / surveys per<strong>for</strong>med• UWE Estates guidance sought• Consider and reflect budgetary and energy conservation requirements• <strong>Design</strong>er to review case studies and technical papers <strong>of</strong> similar projects13.2 Initial Equipment Space Assessment:• This is required <strong>for</strong> early assessment <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> equipment space requirements <strong>for</strong>co-ordination with <strong>the</strong> building designer.• BSRIA documents and Institutes/CIBSE rules <strong>of</strong> thumb can be used as a check.• Consideration shall be given to <strong>the</strong> adequate sizing and layout <strong>of</strong> electrical switchrooms/electrical service cupboards <strong>for</strong> coordination with <strong>the</strong> building designer. Ifdifficulty is experienced in complying with this requirement <strong>the</strong>n it shall immediately bebrought to <strong>the</strong> attention <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> UWE Estates Department Principal Engineer.13.3 Equipment Selection:• Selected to maximize operational efficiency and parts availability• To suit local ambient and environmental conditions• Continuity with existing plant and manufacturers where appropriate• To be selected to minimize <strong>the</strong> impact <strong>of</strong> future maintenance operations and to beeasily maintainable.13.4 Equipment Location:• Maintain safe access <strong>for</strong> installation and future maintenance• Take into account technical requirements and environmental/local ambient conditions& visual aspects.• Allowance <strong>for</strong> future expansion• Access shall be via communal areas ra<strong>the</strong>r than occupied spaces.14.0 Documents to be Issued by <strong>Design</strong>er / External Consultants14.1 General:The following paragraphs schedule <strong>the</strong> 3 reports that will be required to be provided by <strong>the</strong>designer at strategic points within each project. These will generally be in <strong>the</strong> <strong>for</strong>m <strong>of</strong>multi-disciplined reports coordinated with all members <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> design team, and issued by<strong>the</strong> lead consultant. They shall be issued to <strong>the</strong> Estates CA\Engineer to an agreedprogramme.14.2 Conceptual <strong>Design</strong> Confirmation (CDC), RIBA Stage CThis document is required <strong>for</strong> <strong>University</strong> audit purposes and to ensure that all clientrequirements have been met, with <strong>the</strong> design <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e being suitable <strong>for</strong> development totender stage. It will also be used as a final check against funds allocated <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> project.(see pro<strong>for</strong>ma Appendix A & C).14.3 Tender Issue, RIBA Stage GThis is in essence, a confirmation <strong>of</strong> any changes to <strong>the</strong> CDC plus additions detailingamongst o<strong>the</strong>rs: copy <strong>of</strong> all calculations and final budget check (see pro<strong>for</strong>ma Appendix B &D).Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical20 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>14.4 Handover, RIBA Stage LThis is in essence, a confirmation <strong>of</strong> any changes to <strong>the</strong> Stage G requirements, andconfirmation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> original design intent, plus amendments to incorporate essentialin<strong>for</strong>mation (<strong>for</strong> occupiers and future maintenance) such as details <strong>of</strong> critical testdocumentation, in<strong>for</strong>mation required at handover should be considered pre-contract andcollated in <strong>the</strong> prescribed UWE <strong>for</strong>mat. (see pro<strong>for</strong>ma Appendix E).15.0 Electrical System Selection & Configurations15.1 General15.2 LightingThe electrical designers’ duties include <strong>the</strong> analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building’s façade in conjunctionwith <strong>the</strong> building designer and structural engineer to determine <strong>the</strong> areas <strong>of</strong> glazing to aidday-lighting design and ultimately increase <strong>the</strong> energy efficiency.Consideration at an early stage should be given to future services requirements.The electrical services designer shall liaise with all members <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> design team including<strong>the</strong> building designer and structural engineer to provide an integratedbuilding/structural/services installation. This must include coordination <strong>of</strong> electrical builderswork requirements, plant/equipment space and significant apertures required within <strong>the</strong>structure.Coordination is also required with <strong>the</strong> mechanical services designer regarding <strong>the</strong> powerand control requirements <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> mechanical services.The electrical services designer shall liaise closely with <strong>the</strong> mechanical services designer tomake certain that all services routes are carefully coordinated to ensure conflicts areeliminated from <strong>the</strong> design.General• Low energy light sources shall be utilized and due thought given to <strong>the</strong> selection <strong>of</strong>appropriate light fittings and to <strong>the</strong> colour rendering. The design shall be developed toPart 5 | M echanical & Electrical21 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>comply with <strong>the</strong> requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> 2002 amendment to Part L (ADL2) <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> BuildingRegulations.• All luminaires shall have light output ratios (LOR’s) <strong>of</strong> at least 0.75 and incorporate lowloss, high frequency DALI control gear.• Generally, <strong>the</strong> colour temperature <strong>of</strong> lamps shall be 4000K (Intermediate).• Cost effective lighting control systems incorporating presence detection and daylightlinking by digital modulation to be utilized. Systems to be provided with local over-ridecontrol.• Internal rooms with large areas <strong>of</strong> glazing shall include photocell control / daylightlinking.• Presence detection shall be provided in corridors spaces during normal hours <strong>of</strong>building occupation.• Provide adequate switching arrangements where applicable to permit ‘goodhousekeeping’ by staff and students. The switching facility should provide flexible localcontrol <strong>for</strong> changing patterns <strong>of</strong> use and occupation and also permit considerablereductions in lighting load <strong>for</strong> out-<strong>of</strong>-hours security patrols.• Careful consideration <strong>for</strong> future maintenance tasks in relation to <strong>the</strong> positioning <strong>of</strong>luminaires and mounting height. Consider <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> uplighters and suspended lightingsystems <strong>for</strong> rooms with high ceilings. Attempt to eliminate from <strong>the</strong> design, <strong>the</strong>requirement <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> access equipment <strong>for</strong> future maintenance tasks.• Architectural and interior design requirements should be closely co-ordinated inrespect <strong>of</strong> colour rendering and display effect without compromising energy cost.• Cables shall be a minimum size <strong>of</strong> 1.5mm2.• A minimum <strong>of</strong> 10% <strong>of</strong> each lamp type shall be provided as spares within <strong>the</strong>specification and be supplied to <strong>the</strong> Estates CA at Handover stage.As a guideline <strong>the</strong> following shall apply• The lighting system shall be designed so that it complies with ‘The BuildingRegulations 2000; Part L Conservation with Fuel and Power’.• Lighting in all areas shall be designed and installed to comply with <strong>the</strong> relevant CIBSELighting <strong>Guide</strong>s.• All lighting in <strong>of</strong>fice areas shall be designed and installed to comply with CIBSELighting <strong>Guide</strong> LG7.• All lighting in teaching rooms, lecture rooms, shall be designed and installed to complywith CIBSE Lighting <strong>Guide</strong> LG5 and BS EN 12464 Part 1.• The design documentation shall be produced, and submitted <strong>for</strong> examination; thisdocumentation shall include detailed calculation sheets <strong>for</strong> each sub and final circuit,showing connected load, circuit protection type and rating, load current, voltage dropand derivation <strong>of</strong> protective conductor sizes. These calculations shall be used by <strong>the</strong>Contractor to verify electrical loadings <strong>of</strong> distribution equipment and to calculate loadson main and sub-main distribution systems.• Samples shall be submitted <strong>for</strong> ALL luminaires to <strong>the</strong> contract administrator / engineerin sufficient time so as to seek approval be<strong>for</strong>e final order placement with <strong>the</strong>irsuppliers to avoid contract delays being incurred during <strong>the</strong> installation period.• Internal lighting circuit cables shall not be less than 1.5 mm² conductor CSA or morethan 2.5 mm². Final circuit wiring shall be LSF singles cable, reference 6491B, to BS6004:2000, enclosed in galvanised steel trunking and conduit. The installation shall beconcealed in <strong>the</strong> fabric <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building, flush down walls and recessed in ceiling voids.• Lighting circuits containing high wattage luminaries (above 150W) shall be individuallydesigned. Cable sizes, protective devices shall be carefully calculated to suit <strong>the</strong>particular installation in <strong>the</strong>se cases.• Lighting circuits shall be protected by 10A miniature circuit breakers, located in <strong>the</strong>specified distribution boards as shown on <strong>the</strong> distribution schematic drawing, with <strong>the</strong>load on each MCB limited to 50% <strong>of</strong> its current rating.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical22 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>• Circuit breaker types shall be appropriate <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> light source employed e.g. Type C <strong>for</strong>fluorescent or discharge lamps.• Final connections to luminaries shall be dependent upon <strong>the</strong> location <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> luminaire.• Luminaries Recessed into or Fixed below Suspended Ceilings Luminaries shall beinstalled recessed into <strong>the</strong> suspended ceiling or fitted directly below <strong>the</strong> suspendedceiling as indicated on <strong>the</strong> drawings.• Luminaries shall be connected via 3pin or 4pin plug-in ceiling rose connectorscomplying with BS 6972 and BS 7001 located in <strong>the</strong> ceiling void. Generally 3pinconnectors shall be used, 4-pin connectors shall be used <strong>for</strong> emergency luminaries,<strong>the</strong> fourth pin being <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> unswitched live.• Modular plug in distribution boxes shall be located in <strong>the</strong> ceiling void, adjacent to <strong>the</strong>luminaire fixed to <strong>the</strong> building structure/trunking, behind an accessible ceiling tile to <strong>the</strong>side <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> luminaire.• The final connections shall be in heat resistant flexible cable.• Luminaries installed on or suspended from s<strong>of</strong>fits in areas with exposed electricalinstallations. Luminaries shall be installed ei<strong>the</strong>r directly on <strong>the</strong> s<strong>of</strong>fit or suspendedfrom it.• Where luminaries are fixed directly to <strong>the</strong> s<strong>of</strong>fit <strong>the</strong>y shall be connected direct to <strong>the</strong>final circuit wiring with <strong>the</strong> final connections using heat resistant single core wiring fromterminations in accessible conduit boxes or adaptable boxes.• Luminaries installed on s<strong>of</strong>fits / walls in areas with concealed electrical installationsluminaries shall be installed directly on <strong>the</strong> s<strong>of</strong>fit / wall.• Wiring shall be concealed, recessed into or passing through <strong>the</strong> s<strong>of</strong>fit structure. Finalconnections shall be in heat resistant single core wiring from terminations in accessibleconduit boxes or adaptable boxes.DaylightingIn accordance with <strong>the</strong> energy section <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> BREEAM assessment, and to help to achieve<strong>the</strong> required BREEAM rating <strong>the</strong>re is a requirement to incorporate good day lighting into <strong>the</strong>design.Lighting ControlGeneral: The lighting controls within <strong>the</strong> building shall comply with “The BuildingRegulations 2000, Part L2A Section ‘Controls <strong>for</strong> general lighting in all types <strong>of</strong> spaces’.The lighting control system in open space <strong>of</strong>fices shall have <strong>the</strong> following:• Presence detection incorporating local manual switching to all <strong>of</strong>fice spaces. Presencedetection shall be provided on a 10m² grid so as to detect any personnel in any areaand at any workstation.• Manual switches shall be provided in accordance with “The Building Regulations 2000.Part L2A Section ‘Controls <strong>for</strong> general lighting in all types <strong>of</strong> spaces’” which stipulatesthat ‘<strong>the</strong> distance on plan from any local switch to any luminaire it controls shouldgenerally be not more than 6 metres or twice <strong>the</strong> height <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> luminaire above <strong>the</strong> floorif this is greater’.Reception AreasLighting control shall be provided to allow <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> ease <strong>of</strong> operation <strong>of</strong> individual circuits andoperation <strong>of</strong> a number <strong>of</strong> preset scenes via a touch screen control panel with graphicaldisplay.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical23 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Lighting shall be controllable as individual effects and areas <strong>for</strong> scene setting by <strong>the</strong> lightingcontrol system.Café AreasLighting control shall be provided to allow <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> ease <strong>of</strong> operation <strong>of</strong> individual circuits andoperation <strong>of</strong> a number <strong>of</strong> preset scenes via a touch screen control panel with graphicaldisplay.Lighting shall be controllable as individual effects and areas <strong>for</strong> scene setting by <strong>the</strong> lightingcontrol system.Exhibition SpaceLighting control shall be provided to allow <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> ease <strong>of</strong> operation <strong>of</strong> individual circuits andoperation <strong>of</strong> a number <strong>of</strong> preset scenes via a touch screen control panel with graphicaldisplay.Lighting shall be controllable as individual effects and areas <strong>for</strong> scene setting by <strong>the</strong> lightingcontrol system.Teaching SpacesLighting controls shall be provided by presence detection and manual switching. Thelighting will generally be provided by rows <strong>of</strong> luminaires running parallel to <strong>the</strong> teachingsurface.Local manual switches shall be provided to allow <strong>the</strong> occupant to switch ‘<strong>of</strong>f’ lighting whennot required. Lighting shall be manually switched in rows <strong>of</strong> luminaires running parallel to<strong>the</strong> teaching surface so as to turn <strong>of</strong>f lighting adjacent to <strong>the</strong> interactivewhiteboard/projector screen.Two rows <strong>of</strong> fittings running parallel to <strong>the</strong> building perimeter façade shall be provided withdaylight linking dimming control to maximise <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> available natural light.Workshop RoomsLighting controls shall be provided by manual switching and presence detection. Whererotating machines or machines <strong>of</strong> any kind are employed that may cause injury if ‘knockedinto’ <strong>the</strong>n manual switching should be used throughout.The lighting shall be daylight linked. Two rows <strong>of</strong> fittings running parallel to <strong>the</strong> buildingperimeter façade shall be provided with daylight linking dimming control to maximise <strong>the</strong>use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> available natural light.Breakout/Social Learning AreasGenerally lighting controls shall be provided by integrated PIR detectors within <strong>the</strong>luminaires. Additional ceiling recessed detectors shall be use to ensure sufficient presencedetection coverage is provided to prevent nuisance automatic switching <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lighting.The luminaires within <strong>the</strong> open plan <strong>of</strong>fices shall be daylight linked and dimmable such thata level <strong>of</strong> lighting within <strong>the</strong>se areas is always achieved.Local manual switching shall also be provided in rows to allow <strong>the</strong> occupants to turn <strong>of</strong>flighting when not required.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical24 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Open Plan Offices• Lighting shall be controlled by presence detection and manual switching.• Two rows <strong>of</strong> fittings running parallel to <strong>the</strong> building perimeter façade shall be providedwith daylight linking dimming control to maximise <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> available natural light.• The Contractor shall also provide local manual switching in rows to allow <strong>the</strong> occupantsto switch ‘<strong>of</strong>f’ lighting when not required.Cellular OfficesLighting controls shall be provided by presence detection and manual switching.Two rows <strong>of</strong> fittings running parallel to <strong>the</strong> building perimeter façade shall be provided withdaylight linking dimming control to maximise <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> available natural light.The Contractor shall also provide local manual switches to allow <strong>the</strong> occupants to turn <strong>of</strong>flighting when not required.Meeting & Interview RoomsGenerally lighting controls shall be provided by presence detection and manual switching.Where <strong>the</strong> meeting room or interview room has an external window <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> lighting shallalso be daylight linked.CorridorsLighting controls shall be provided by presence detection. Where appropriate <strong>the</strong> lightingwithin corridors shall be linked with photocells such that if <strong>the</strong>re is sufficient natural light,within corridors <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> artificial lighting will switch ‘<strong>of</strong>f’.In a building with a networked lighting control system, <strong>the</strong> lighting on corridors shallremain illuminated when <strong>the</strong> building is occupied and shall not switch <strong>of</strong>f, except where <strong>the</strong>photocells sense that <strong>the</strong>re is sufficient natural light, until <strong>the</strong> lighting control system sensethat <strong>the</strong> building is empty.StaircasesLighting controls shall be provided by presence detection. Where appropriate <strong>the</strong> lightingwithin staircases shall be linked into photocells such that if <strong>the</strong>re is sufficient natural lightwithin a staircase <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> artificial lighting will switch ‘<strong>of</strong>f’.In a building with a networked lighting control system, <strong>the</strong> lighting on staircases shallremain illuminated when <strong>the</strong> building is occupied and shall not switch <strong>of</strong>f, except where <strong>the</strong>photocells sense that <strong>the</strong>re is sufficient natural light, until <strong>the</strong> lighting control system sensethat <strong>the</strong> building is empty.LibraryThe lighting control shall be by manual switching and presence detection.Shower RoomsThe lighting control shall be by presence detection.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical25 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>15.3 Emergency LightingSystem to be designed to comply with all relevant parts <strong>of</strong> BS5266.Escape routes shall have a system <strong>of</strong> emergency lighting throughout <strong>the</strong> route to <strong>the</strong> finalexit from <strong>the</strong> building.The emergency lighting system in all areas shall be a fully automatic, self testing computeraddressable (with LAN connection) system. The location <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> computer terminal shall beagreed with UWE Estates Department.The emergency light fittings shall be stand-alone, self testing and addressable,non-maintained units, appropriately selected <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> specific location.The escape route shall be indicated by non-maintained illuminated signage.Where <strong>the</strong> absence <strong>of</strong> adequate external ambient light may hinder <strong>the</strong> safe evacuation <strong>of</strong><strong>the</strong> building, additional artificial emergency lighting shall be provided.15.4 External LightingWhere colour rendering is not critical, consideration should be given to <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> moreefficient LED sources.External lighting shall be controlled via <strong>the</strong> BMS system and photocell operation. Anover-ride switch shall be provided but shall be accessible to authorized persons only andshall be linked to <strong>the</strong> BMS system to give an alarm condition on operation.Avoid upward light pollution and consider overspill onto neighbouring buildings.Careful consideration <strong>for</strong> future maintenance tasks in relation to <strong>the</strong> positioning <strong>of</strong>luminaires and mounting height.Due consideration shall be given to <strong>the</strong> maintainability on <strong>the</strong> selection <strong>of</strong> columns or fittingsthat can be folded or lowered to limit <strong>the</strong> need <strong>for</strong> work at heightConsider <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> bollard lights and street lights to illuminate external walkways asopposed to floodlighting an area.15.5 HV SwitchgearHV switchgear panels shall be built to IEC 60694Switchgear shall be a minimum <strong>of</strong> Form 4b Type 5 construction.Switchgear shall be a minimum <strong>of</strong> IP44.Sulfur Hexafluoride (SF6) on all incoming and bus-section switches. The SF6 shall beequipped with intelligent microprocessor protection relays and trip units <strong>of</strong>fering datameasuring and communication facilities.Switchgear shall have pulsed output, kWh and kVArh digital meters with serial output <strong>for</strong> A,V, kW, kVAr and power factor. Metering to be provided <strong>for</strong> each outgoing circuit and belinked to <strong>the</strong> BMS system.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical26 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>A separate cubicle shall be provided <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> termination <strong>of</strong> all metering outputs and externalcontrol circuits. Access shall be possible with <strong>the</strong> switchboard remaining live.Allowances <strong>of</strong> at least 25% spare capacity shall be made <strong>for</strong> future expansion.15.6 LV Modular SwitchboardsModular Panel Boards shall be built to BS EN 60439-1: 1994Switchboards shall be a minimum <strong>of</strong> Form 4b Type 5 construction.Air Circuit Breakers (ACB’s) on all incoming and bus-section switches. The ACB’s shall beequipped with intelligent microprocessor protection relays and trip units <strong>of</strong>fering datameasuring and communication facilities.Switchboards shall have pulsed output, kWh and kVArh digital meters with serial output <strong>for</strong>A, V, kW, kVAr and power factor. Metering to be provided <strong>for</strong> each outgoing circuit and belinked to <strong>the</strong> BMS system.A separate cubicle shall be provided <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> termination <strong>of</strong> all metering outputs and externalcontrol circuits. Access shall be possible with <strong>the</strong> switchboard remaining live.Outgoing switches up to and including 630A shall be fuse-switch type.Outgoing switches rated at 800A or over, shall preferably be ACB type.Switchboards shall incorporate transient voltage surge suppression protective devices.Allowances <strong>of</strong> at least 25% spare capacity shall be made <strong>for</strong> future expansion.Spare cubicles shall be incorporated into <strong>the</strong> design <strong>of</strong> LV modular switchboards <strong>for</strong> futureadaptations.An assessment <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> harmonics content and power factor correction requirement <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong>connected loads shall be made at <strong>the</strong> design stage. Appropriate measures shall beincorporated into <strong>the</strong> design <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> LV modular switchboards.Devices <strong>for</strong> locking-<strong>of</strong>f switches <strong>for</strong> future maintenance and isolation purposes shall beprovided within <strong>the</strong> specification. The padlocks and keys shall be suitably engraved <strong>for</strong>identification purposes.15.7 MeteringSub-metering <strong>of</strong> electrical supplies shall be provided in accordance with <strong>the</strong> requirements<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Building Regulations specifically “The Building Regulations 2000 part L Conservation<strong>of</strong> Fuel and Power”.Metering units shall be installed to all distribution boards ei<strong>the</strong>r in <strong>the</strong> main switchboard orintegrally in each distribution board. All meters shall have pulsed outputs.Metering units shall be linked to <strong>the</strong> Facilities – Estates Elcomponent Energy MonitoringPackage and <strong>the</strong> ‘Power Logic’ monitoring and diagnostic system. An analysis study shallbe completed <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> buildings to ensure that radio signals can reach <strong>the</strong> existingtransmitter/receiver <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Facilities – Estates Elcomponent Energy Monitoring Packageand that <strong>the</strong>re is spare capacity on <strong>the</strong> Elcomponent system. Where <strong>the</strong> signal strength isPart 5 | M echanical & Electrical27 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>weak or not present <strong>the</strong>n number <strong>of</strong> additional transmitter/receiver units shall be installedas required.All necessary equipment required to ensure that each metering unit can be connected onto<strong>the</strong> Facilities – Estates Elcomponent Energy Monitoring Package including data points,power supplies, etc shall be provided. Where, required allowance shall be made <strong>for</strong>modifying and/or extending <strong>the</strong> existing system as required ensuring that it is sufficientlysized to accommodate <strong>the</strong> additional metering units within <strong>the</strong> buildings and an additional25% spare capacity.Where <strong>the</strong> system needs to be augmented <strong>the</strong>n a complete system shall be installed.Sub-metered electricity supplies shall be provided <strong>for</strong> any retail and catering concessionunits.15.8 LV Modular Panel BoardsModular Panel Boards shall be built to BS EN 60439-1: 1994Panel boards shall be a minimum <strong>of</strong> Form 4b Type 5 construction.Fuse switch on all incoming switches.Panel boards shall have pulsed output, kWh and kVArh digital meters with serial output <strong>for</strong>A, V, kW, kVAr and power factor. Metering to be provided <strong>for</strong> each outgoing circuit.A separate cubicle shall be provided <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> termination <strong>of</strong> all metering outputs and externalcontrol circuits. Access shall be possible with <strong>the</strong> switchboard remaining live.Outgoing switches shall be fuse-switch type.Panel boards shall incorporate transient voltage surge suppression protective devices.Allowances <strong>of</strong> at least 25% spare capacity shall be made <strong>for</strong> future expansion.Devices <strong>for</strong> locking-<strong>of</strong>f switches <strong>for</strong> future maintenance and isolation purposes shall beprovided within <strong>the</strong> specification. The padlocks and keys shall be suitably engraved <strong>for</strong>identification purposes.Access space to be allowed to <strong>the</strong> rear <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> panels to enable maintenance.Resistive rubber mats to BS 921:1976 to be provided <strong>for</strong> all LV panels (in addition to HV)15.9 LV Distribution BoardsModular Panel Boards shall be built to BS EN 60439-1: 1994Allowance to be made <strong>for</strong> future expansion. Distribution boards shall have at least 25%spare capacity.Separate distribution boards shall be provided at each location to segregate <strong>the</strong> followingservices: lighting services, and small power services to teaching/academic areas.MCB’s and RCBO’s to have a minimum rated breaking capacity <strong>of</strong> 10kA.MCB’s and RCBO’s to have a facility <strong>for</strong> padlocking <strong>of</strong>f.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical28 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>RCBO’s to be single module units.Distribution boards to be provided with door locks.Distribution boards to incorporate a main switch disconnector. Devices <strong>for</strong> locking-<strong>of</strong>fMCB and RCBO dollys <strong>for</strong> future maintenance and isolation purposes shall be providedwithin <strong>the</strong> specification. The padlocks and keys shall be suitably engraved <strong>for</strong> identificationpurposes.15.10 Transient over Voltage ProtectionThe main switchboard shall have an integral three phase and neutral transient over voltageprotection unit to protect <strong>the</strong> system from <strong>the</strong> effects <strong>of</strong> lightning strikes and harmonicspikes.The transient over voltage protection unit shall be rated at 100 Amps.15.11 Power Factor CorrectionA suitably sized spare way on <strong>the</strong> main switchboard shall be provided <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> installation <strong>of</strong>power correction. Power factor correction shall be provided with detuned capacitors toserve <strong>the</strong> whole building. The switchboard shall have integral power factor correctionequipment comprising multiple 25kVA capacitor banks to correct <strong>the</strong> reactive load andautomatic switching control <strong>of</strong> each bank to apply <strong>the</strong> necessary capacitance.The power factor shall be between 0.95 lagging and unity power factor at any given time.15.12 Harmonic FiltersA suitably sized spare way on <strong>the</strong> main switchboard shall be provided <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> installation <strong>of</strong>harmonic filters. The harmonic content <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> system shall be monitored over <strong>the</strong> first threemonths and <strong>the</strong> results shall be made available to <strong>the</strong> Facilities – Estates Department,UWE <strong>University</strong>. Should <strong>the</strong> harmonic content be above <strong>the</strong> limit as detailed in G5/4 ‘Limits<strong>for</strong> Harmonics in UK Electricity Supply System’ <strong>the</strong>n harmonic filters shall be installed toreduce <strong>the</strong> levels to an acceptable level.15.13 Fire Alarm System15.13.1 GeneralThe UWE standard <strong>for</strong> detection is Type L3 <strong>for</strong> Non-Residential and L2 <strong>for</strong> Residential..System to be designed to comply with all relevant parts <strong>of</strong> BS5839-1:2002+A2:2008.Spare capacity shall be made available <strong>for</strong> future expansion <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> system.The category <strong>of</strong> fire alarm system to be applied will be project specific and will be advisedby <strong>the</strong> Estates CA.The system shall be an analogue addressable type from <strong>the</strong> Gent Vigilon range.All devices and accessories shall be selected from <strong>the</strong> Gent Vigilon analogue range.Remote indicators will be required <strong>for</strong> all concealed detection devices and interface units.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical29 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Flashing beacons shall have a red lens. They shall be positioned at various locations whichwill include corridors and communal areas, bars and café areas, lecture <strong>the</strong>atres,classrooms, plantrooms, toilets etc.Plant override test switches shall be a key operated type.In areas where entertainment equipment will be used, fire alarm interface units shall beinstalled to disconnect <strong>the</strong> power to <strong>the</strong> equipment in <strong>the</strong> event <strong>of</strong> a fire alarm activation.15.13.2 Fire Alarm System CablingBS5839-1:2002+A2:2008 - defines two levels <strong>of</strong> fire resistance <strong>for</strong> fire resisting cablesystems, termed ‘standard’ and ‘enhanced’The preferred method <strong>of</strong> cabling is mineral-insulated copper-shea<strong>the</strong>d (MICS) cables withred coloured outer sheath, minimum sized at 1.5mm 2 , with red PVC shrouds at allterminations. This cable type meets <strong>the</strong> ‘enhanced’ standard.Prior to completion <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> design, <strong>the</strong> designer shall submit to <strong>the</strong> UWE Estates DepartmentPrincipal Engineer a written statement detailing con<strong>for</strong>mance with this requirement and/orreasons <strong>for</strong> proposing <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> ‘standard’ cabling within <strong>the</strong> fire alarm system design <strong>for</strong>consideration.15.13.3 Fire Alarm System / Mechanical Systems InterfaceA fire alarm system interface unit shall be installed adjacent to each mechanical plantcontrol panel. This will include <strong>the</strong> ventilation system and boiler plant control panels.15.13.4 Fire Alarm System / Access Control Systems InterfaceAll doors with electro-magnetic locking systems shall include a provision to allow <strong>the</strong> door tobe opened in <strong>the</strong> event <strong>of</strong> a fire alarm or o<strong>the</strong>r emergency situation.A fire alarm system interface unit shall be installed adjacent to each secure door with anadditional manual break glass override – coloured green – mounted local to <strong>the</strong> door.Careful co-ordination to be ensured between <strong>the</strong> lock installer and fire alarm systeminstaller.15.14 ContainmentThe designer shall utilise a factor +50% when sizing containment systems to allow sparecapacity <strong>for</strong> future adaptations.General: Galvanised steel trunking / conduit and accessories. Heavy gauge in boiler /plantrooms.Dado trunking: 3 compartment, white, pvc dado trunking and accessories. As Honey well3D Prestige.SWA cables: Heavy duty, galvanized steel cable tray and cable ladders/racks.Data/telephone: Dedicated, heavy duty, galvanized steel cable basketFire alarm system: Dedicated, heavy duty galvanized steel cable tray with metallic cableties.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical30 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Security alarm system:Dedicated, heavy duty galvanized steel cable tray15.15 Lightning Protection System<strong>Design</strong>ed to BS EN 62305:2006.15.16 Transient Voltage Surge Suppression and Protection<strong>Design</strong>ed to BS665115.17 UPS SystemsUPS systems shall be selected to protect ‘critical loads’ from loss <strong>of</strong> mains power supply.Typical critical loads to be considered are data storage and processing systems,telecommunications network equipment and point <strong>of</strong> sales terminals.Consideration must be given to:The size <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> loadThe load typeThe load process requirementsThe space available to house <strong>the</strong> equipmentThe suitability <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> proposed location eg: size and weightAccess to <strong>the</strong> proposed locationsFuture expansion <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> systemThe additional requirement <strong>for</strong> mechanical cooling.Period <strong>of</strong> autonomy required <strong>for</strong> each application15.18 Assistance Call SystemsAssistance call systems shall be installed in all disabled wc’s. Alarms, both audible andvisual, shall be given local to <strong>the</strong> disabled wc and also be repeated within <strong>the</strong>porters/security lodge on a purpose made alarm board indicating <strong>the</strong> location <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> alarm.The reset button shall be located within <strong>the</strong> disabled wc.The electrical services designer shall liaise with <strong>the</strong> UWE Safety Unit and building designerto determine suitable locations <strong>for</strong> disabled safe refuges. A purpose made system shall beinstalled and linked to <strong>the</strong> porters/security lodge (location to be advised). The system shallincorporate an intercom system to allow direct conversation between <strong>the</strong> person requiringassistance and <strong>the</strong> security personnel. The main control panel shall indicate <strong>the</strong> location <strong>of</strong><strong>the</strong> alarm by means <strong>of</strong> an electronic mimic board.15.19 Small Power ServicesComplete small power installations shall be provided to serve each area/floor <strong>of</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical31 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>The number <strong>of</strong> socket outlets, dedicated supplies, etc shall be derived from <strong>the</strong> standardroom data sheets and project specific room data sheets.Small power systems shall be designed to comply with <strong>the</strong> requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> latest edition<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> IEE Wiring Regulations BS7671 latest edition and o<strong>the</strong>r applicable British andEuropean Standards and Codes <strong>of</strong> Practice.The room data sheets detail <strong>the</strong> minimum requirements <strong>for</strong> small power outlets in eacharea. Allowance shall be made <strong>for</strong> future expansion on each sub circuit in his calculations.IT server rooms and IT suites/computer labs shall have an emergency stop button mountedlocally within <strong>the</strong> room to isolate <strong>the</strong> power in <strong>the</strong> event <strong>of</strong> an emergency.The installation layout drawings <strong>for</strong> small power shall include all small power outletlocations, circuit references and outlet types.Final circuit wiring shall be wired in LSF single cables. Each final circuit cable in <strong>the</strong>distribution board shall be fitted with a propriety cable ferrule system identifying <strong>the</strong> finalcircuit cable reference. The cabling shall be sized in accordance with <strong>the</strong> latest edition <strong>of</strong><strong>the</strong> IEE Wiring Regulations.Final circuits shall be installed in galvanised steel trunking and conduit within ceiling voidsand enclosed in galvanised steel conduit in walls. In <strong>the</strong> plant rooms, switch rooms, etc finalcircuits shall be wired in XLSF single core cables in exposed galvanised steel trunking andconduit.All twin switched 13A, 230V socket outlets shall have dual earths and outboard switches.Cables to be a minimum size <strong>of</strong> 2.5mm 2 .In all teaching rooms, lecture rooms and meeting rooms shall be provided with 13A socketoutlets, audiovisual outlets, RJ45 outlets <strong>for</strong> data points and a telephone point <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> Audiovisual and IT installations, and containment <strong>for</strong> future Audio visual and IT installations. Therequirements are contained in a separate Audio visual and IT specification.15.20 Under Floor Bus-Bar SystemIn areas with raised access floors an under-floor bus-bar system shall be provided to serve13A socket outlets.The bus-bar shall comply with <strong>the</strong> requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> latest edition IEE Wiring Regulations.Wiring to <strong>the</strong> under-floor bus-bar shall be in XLPE/SWA/LSF cabling installed directly on<strong>the</strong> slab floor. All under-floor bus-bar system shall be rated at 63A and shall be suppliedcables sized <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> full load <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> bus-bar. Bus-bar shall be provided under all teachingspaces, IT suites, meeting rooms, <strong>of</strong>fices and studiosThe under-floor bus-bar system shall enable <strong>the</strong> connection <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> four compartment floorboxes. The bus-bar track shall be located in <strong>the</strong> floor with <strong>the</strong> maximum spacing <strong>of</strong> 5.5metres between bus-bars and 2.5 metres from walls. The floor boxes shall be fed via prewired3 metre un-fused tap <strong>of</strong>fs, <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> fused type tap <strong>of</strong>fs to served floor boxes shall notbe permitted.Under-floor bus-bar systems in IT suites and <strong>of</strong>fice areas shall be used to enableconnection to desk mounted socket outlet modules. The desk mounted socket outletmodules shall be fed via prewired 5 metre fused tap <strong>of</strong>fs which shall exit <strong>the</strong> floor void viagrommets mounted in <strong>the</strong> floor. The desk mounted socket outlet modules shall be providedPart 5 | M echanical & Electrical32 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>as part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> electrical installations work. Each tap <strong>of</strong>f unit identified in <strong>the</strong> room datasheets shall consist <strong>of</strong> an electrical supply to <strong>the</strong> desk mounted socket outlet modules andan RJ45 data outlet.Dado Trunking In areas where raised floors are not installed, a 3 compartment dadotrunking shall be installed around <strong>the</strong> perimeter <strong>of</strong> rooms and columns. The dado trunkingshall be installed above desk height. The dado trunking shall accommodate twin switched13 amp socket outlets and data/voice outlets.The 13amp socket outlets mounted on <strong>the</strong> dado trunking shall be wired in a Ringconfiguration and NO spurs shall be permitted.Where sockets and IT outlets are installed on dado trunking grey inserts shall be installedei<strong>the</strong>r side to comply with Part M and provide a 30% visual contrast.15.21 Studios and WorkshopsThe electrical distribution system in studios and workshops shall be configured such that all<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> small power outlets (except cleaners outlets) can be isolated through one removablekey switch located within <strong>the</strong> staff <strong>of</strong>fice area. A ‘Firewatch’ panel shall be installed <strong>for</strong> thispurpose.Emergency stop buttons shall be installed throughout <strong>the</strong> studios and workshops to isolatepower if activated. Stop buttons shall be ‘non-latching’ type buttons and isolate all power tomachinery and open sockets. Gas interlocking.Socket outlets shall generally have RCD protection except where <strong>the</strong>y have beeninstalled specifically <strong>for</strong> computers, etc.Sockets <strong>for</strong> cleaners shall be installed on a separate circuit and shall not be affected by <strong>the</strong>emergency stop system. The outlets shall be MK Commando type outlets to preventstudents from plugging in power tools.15.22 LaboratoriesThe electrical distribution system in laboratories shall be configured such that all <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>small power outlets (except cleaners outlets) can be isolated through oneremovable key switch located within <strong>the</strong> staff <strong>of</strong>fice area.Emergency Isolation Points, inter-linked to gas supply shall be installed throughout <strong>the</strong>laboratory to isolate power and gas supply if activated. Stop buttons shall be ‘non -latching’type buttons and isolate all power to machinery and open sockets.Socket outlets shall generally have RCD protection except where <strong>the</strong>y have been installedspecifically <strong>for</strong> computers, etc.Sockets <strong>for</strong> cleaners shall be installed on a separate circuit and shall not be affected by <strong>the</strong>emergency stop system.15.23 Electrical Supplies to Mechanical PlantInstallations in connection with mechanical engineering services power supplies andcontrol circuits shall be supplied using in<strong>for</strong>mation from <strong>the</strong> mechanical services design.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical33 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Power supplies and control cabling shall be provided, as required, to all items <strong>of</strong>mechanical plant and equipment.Plant power supply circuits shall be wired in copper conductor, XLPE insulated, single wirearmoured, LSF shea<strong>the</strong>d cable run on suspended cable tray from mechanical controlpanels located in <strong>the</strong> plant rooms.Equipment power supplies, such as <strong>for</strong> extract fans, shall be wired in 6491B (XLSF) cablerun in trunking and conduit.The controls wiring shall be installed in cabling and containment systems as required tomatch <strong>the</strong> requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Mechanical services design and <strong>the</strong> requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>controls/BMS supplier15.24 Electrical Wall ClocksWhere wall mounted clocks are required <strong>the</strong>y will be radio controlled, securely fixed andmains feed.15.25 Electrical Hand DryersA mains automatic electrical hand dryer shall be installed in each WC. The unit shallincorporate an overheat protection device and installed in accordance with DDA and part Mrequirements.15.26 Hearing Assistance SystemsAnalogue infrared transmission equipment shall be installed within each teachingroom/space. The system shall be compatible with o<strong>the</strong>r units installed throughout UWE.All equipment to be housed in a locked cabinet secured to <strong>the</strong> building fabric.Systems to be complete with radio microphones.15.27 Labelling System15.28 LiftsAll accessories shall be labelled with <strong>the</strong> distribution board room number, distribution boardnumber and circuit reference.Details <strong>of</strong> cable sizes and type, protection device ratings, and point <strong>of</strong> origin shall belabelled on all LV switchboards, panel boards and distribution boards.Details <strong>of</strong> Z e readings with <strong>the</strong> date <strong>of</strong> test shall be displayed at each switch board/panelboard/distribution board.Lifts to be designed to comply with <strong>the</strong> Lift Regulations 1997 and all relevant parts <strong>of</strong> BSEN81:2005 All partsPlease also refer to section 6 <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>15.29 CCTV, Security Alarm, Access Control and Car Park Barrier SystemsThe electrical services designer shall liaise with <strong>the</strong> UWE Security Services Departmentand building designer to determine <strong>the</strong> requirement <strong>for</strong> CCTV, security alarm, accessPart 5 | M echanical & Electrical34 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>15.30 Utilitiescontrol and car park barrier systems. The designer shall incorporate <strong>the</strong>se requirementsinto his design to be provided by <strong>the</strong> electrical services contractor and allow <strong>for</strong> allnecessary power, fire alarm interfaces, data points etc. The designer shall fur<strong>the</strong>r includeall containment and ducting requirements.The designer shall collate all <strong>the</strong> necessary commissioning certificates <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong>se services<strong>for</strong> submission to <strong>the</strong> Estates CA.The designer shall ensure that, where <strong>the</strong>re is an existing supply, it is <strong>of</strong> a suitable type andcapacity <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> anticipated additional load, with due consideration given to <strong>the</strong> load growth<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> existing installation and time/season <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> year. Measurements - over a period <strong>of</strong> 1week - shall be taken to ascertain <strong>the</strong> existing electrical load pr<strong>of</strong>ile.Where a new supply is required, <strong>the</strong> designer shall be responsible <strong>for</strong> arranging with <strong>the</strong>local Electricity Supply Company <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> installation <strong>of</strong> a suitable electrical supply <strong>of</strong>adequate capacity <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> anticipated electrical load.15.31 High Intensity Discharge (HID) LightingAny installation incorporating HID must be subject to a detailed risk evaluation in order toensure compliance with <strong>the</strong> Control <strong>of</strong> Artificial Optical Radiation Regulations 2010.16.0 Approved Electrical SuppliersHV distribution : Square D / Schneider Electric / Siemens Reyrolle /Hawker Siddeley SwitchgearLV switchboards/panel boardsLV distribution boardsLightingLighting ControlWiring accessoriesDado trunkingLightning protectionTransient voltage protectionUPS systemsGeneratorsFire Alarm SystemAssistance AlarmHand DriersCables (all to be LS0H): Square D / Schneider Electric: Square D / Schneider Electric: Refer to UWE luminaire schedule: Zumtobel / Philips: Honeywell MK / MEM: Honeywell MK 3D Prestige: Furse / EES: Furse / Dehn: Chloride / UPS Systems: Broadcrown / Chloride / F G Wilson / Dale Erskine: Gent Vigilon Analogue Addressable System: Wandsworth: Dyson / Air<strong>for</strong>ce17.0 Register Of Approved Electrical Contractors: Delta Crompton /Pirelli / Draka UK.The designer shall advise and/or recommend to Estates CA <strong>of</strong> suitable contractors. EstatesCA will make <strong>the</strong> final selection.Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical35 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>18.0 Commissioning – ElectricalThe designer shall ensure that <strong>the</strong> systems proposed are fully commissionable.Commissioning shall be carried out to manufacturers’ recommendations.CIBSE commissioning codes and BSRIA guides shall be adhered to.100% <strong>of</strong> electrical installation test results shall be checked by <strong>the</strong> electrical designer. Heshall also witness <strong>the</strong> electrical installation testing to verify <strong>the</strong>ir accuracy.The electrical designer shall attend and witness fire alarm commissioning work and verifysound level tests.The electrical designer shall attend and witness emergency lighting commissioning workand lighting level tests to verify <strong>the</strong>ir accuracy.19.0 HandoverAt Practical Completion <strong>the</strong> designer should ensure that <strong>the</strong> minimum in<strong>for</strong>mation detailedwithin <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Handover Report (see Appendix E) are issued to <strong>the</strong> Facilities CA <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong>project. All in<strong>for</strong>mation issued should be a duplication <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> in<strong>for</strong>mation contained within<strong>the</strong> project O&M manuals.With-out receipt <strong>of</strong> this in<strong>for</strong>mation <strong>the</strong> building will not be accepted by UWE.Prior to handover <strong>the</strong> designer should organise <strong>for</strong> a technical walk-round <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> projectarea <strong>for</strong> UWE Facilities staff, maintenance contractors and client end users/stakeholders<strong>for</strong> building familiarization. Date to be included in commissioning programme provided bycommissioning contractor.20.0 Post-Occupancy AssessmentA post-occupancy assessment shall be per<strong>for</strong>med by <strong>the</strong> designer in association with <strong>the</strong>Estates CA after 1 years full occupation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> project area. Reference shall be made to <strong>the</strong>RIBA Post-Occupancy Review <strong>of</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong> (www.architectural.com) and CIBSE PROBE<strong>for</strong>mats.21.0 Appendices21.1 Mechanical AppendicesABConceptual <strong>Design</strong> Confirmation (CDC), Stage C Pro<strong>for</strong>maTender Issue, Stage E Pro<strong>for</strong>ma21.2 Electrical AppendicesCDConceptual <strong>Design</strong> Confirmation (CDC), Stage C Pro<strong>for</strong>maTender Issue, Stage E Pro<strong>for</strong>ma21.3 M&E AppendicesEHandover , RIBA Stage LPart 5 | M echanical & Electrical36 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Section 5 - APPENDIX AMechanical: Conceptual <strong>Design</strong> Confirmation (CDC), Stage C Pro<strong>for</strong>maA1.Summary <strong>of</strong> Client’s Mechanical Services Brief• (attach to rear if necessary)A2.Brief overview <strong>of</strong> Mechanical Services proposedA3.Report on Renewable and Low Carbon TechnologiesA4.Report on Part L strategy• Including method <strong>of</strong> compliance with Part L considering building <strong>the</strong>rmal per<strong>for</strong>mance, summertime overheating, orientation infiltration and consequential improvements.• Include design Energy Per<strong>for</strong>mance CertificateA5.Mechanical services scope <strong>of</strong> worksLPHW heating:BoilersRadiatorsMechanical Ventilation: GeneralToiletsSmoke ManagementLMR ventilationSpecialist extractO<strong>the</strong>r (specify)Cooling:LocalCentralO<strong>the</strong>r (specify)Type <strong>of</strong> refrigerant to be usedCompliance with EN378 (refrigeration systems)Hot Water Services:LocalCentralCold Water Services: TanksMainsUtility Services:GasWaterB.M.S.:Fire:Dry riserWet riserHydrantO<strong>the</strong>r Systems:Fire SuppressionO<strong>the</strong>r (Specify)A6.Variations from UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> Standard Criteria•Y/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NPart 5 | M echanical & Electrical37 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Section 5 - APPENDIX AA7.Schematically layout indicating <strong>Design</strong> PrinciplesDrawing N°: …...................................... (to be attached)A8.BMS Points ScheduleN° <strong>of</strong> new controller: NrN° <strong>of</strong> new master controllers: NrN° <strong>of</strong> analogue inputs:outputs:NrNrN° <strong>of</strong> digital inputs:outputs:NrNrNew intranet connection required?Confirm if above points taken from existing controller(s)Copy <strong>of</strong> proposed labelling attachedY/NY/NY/NA9.Asbestos Survey• Confirmation that Type 3 Asbestos Survey per<strong>for</strong>medA10.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> suppliers•A11.Elemental budget breakdown (including VAT)Element Cost (£)A12.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> Mechanical services design and construction program•A13.Whole Life Costing document•A14.Proposed contractors•A15.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> coordination with structural engineer and building designer•Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical38 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Section 5 - APPENDIX BMECHANICAL: Tender Issue, Stage G Pro<strong>for</strong>maB1.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> major changes from CDC•B2.Schedule <strong>of</strong> all calculations•B3.(copies attached)Schedule <strong>of</strong> Legionella Susceptible Plant•B4.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> notification to Bristol Water• Copy attached (+ response if received)• Confirmation <strong>of</strong> use <strong>of</strong> any RPZ non-return valvesB5.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> plant requiring statutory inspection• Schedule <strong>of</strong> plant• Confirmation <strong>of</strong> safety devices provided (including settings)B6.B7.Building control• Copy <strong>of</strong> part L energy calculations• Ventilation control strategy• Details <strong>of</strong> pressurised Water heatersDisruption to UWE servicesSignificant plant shutdowns required (interruption to existing supplies)• Installation effected• Disruption periodB8.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> fire fighting, smoke management or life safety plant•B9.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> coordination with structural engineer and building designer•B10.Confirmation that internal QA check per<strong>for</strong>med•Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical39 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Section 5 - APPENDIX CELECTRICAL: Conceptual <strong>Design</strong> Confirmation (CDC), Stage C Pro<strong>for</strong>maC1.Summary <strong>of</strong> Client’s electrical services brief• (attach to rear if necessary)C2.Brief overview <strong>of</strong> proposed electrical services• (no more than 500 words)C3.Electrical services scope <strong>of</strong> worksLighting General Y/NEmergencyExternalAutomatic ControlsLV Modular Switch BoardsY/NY/NY/NY/NPower LV Modular Panel Boards Y/NLV Distribution BoardsPower Factor CorrectionHarmonic Filters / ConditionersMeteringSmall Power3ph SuppliesMechanical services requirementsY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NFire Alarms General Y/NInterface with mechanical servicesInterface with access control systemsInterface with entertainment equipmentFlashing beaconsY/NY/NY/NY/NContainmentY/NPart 5 | M echanical & Electrical40 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Section 5 - APPENDIX CIT/Telecoms ServicesCCTV SystemSecurity Alarm SystemAccess Control SystemsVehicle Barrier SystemsLightning Protection SystemTransient Voltage Surge ProtectionUPS SystemsAssistance Call SystemsDisabled Safe Refuge SystemsElectrical Wall ClocksElectrical Hand DryersHearing Assistance SystemsY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NY/NLifts Passenger Y/NGoodsY/NC4.Variations from UWE Standard Electrical <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> Criteria•C5.Schematically layout indicating <strong>Design</strong> PrinciplesDrawing N°: …...................................... (to be attached)C6.Asbestos Survey• Confirmation that Type 3 Asbestos Survey per<strong>for</strong>medC8.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> suppliers/manufacturers <strong>for</strong> equipment and plantTo include <strong>the</strong> following:Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical41 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Section 5 - APPENDIX C• Light fittings and proposed light sources to be utilized.• Wiring accessories• LV Switch Boards• LV Panel Boards• LV Distribution Boards• CablesC9.Elemental budget breakdown (including VAT)Element Cost (£)C10.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> electrical services design and construction programme•C11.Proposed contractors•C12.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> coordination with building designer, structural engineer and mechanicalservices designer•Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical42 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Section 5 - APPENDIX DELECTRICAL: Tender Issue, Stage G Pro<strong>for</strong>maD1.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> major changes from CDC•D2.Schedule <strong>of</strong> all calculations (copies attached)• Lighting. Illuminance level, uni<strong>for</strong>mity, glare index, energy target and W/m2 . Areas thatfall outside <strong>the</strong> W/m 2 parameters to be highlighted.• Daylighting• Emergency Lighting. Coverage calculations• Power. Load calculations and circuit design calculations• Fire Alarm System. Detection device coverage. Cable type. Loop capacitiesD3.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> notification to local Electricity Supply Company• Copy attached (& response if received)D4.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> equipment/installations requiring statutory inspection• Schedule <strong>of</strong> equipment/installationsD5.Building control• Copy <strong>of</strong> part L energy calculations and worksheetsD6.Disruption to UWE servicesSignificant electrical isolations/plant shutdowns required (interruption to existing supplies)• Installation effected• Disruption periodD7.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> Fire Alarm System design/components/strategyPart 5 | M echanical & Electrical43 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Section 5 - APPENDIX D•D8.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> coordination with building designer, structural engineer and mechanicalservices designer•D9.Confirmation that internal QA check per<strong>for</strong>med•Part 5 | M echanical & Electrical44 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Section 5 - APPENDIX EM&E: Handover Report, Stage L Pro<strong>for</strong>maE1.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> major changes from tenderE2.•Schedule <strong>of</strong> Legionella Susceptible PlantE3.•Confirmation <strong>of</strong> Bristol Water Maintenance RequirementsE4.•Confirmation <strong>of</strong> plant requiring statutory inspections• Confirmation <strong>of</strong> plant installed• Schedule <strong>of</strong> safety valves (including settings)• Confirmation <strong>of</strong> above’s basic operating conditions, including:Type <strong>of</strong> liquidProcess temperatures and pressuresSafe operating limitsProvision <strong>of</strong> safety instructionsGeneral:Schedule <strong>of</strong> safety valves (including settings)E5.Confirmation <strong>of</strong> fire fighting or life safety plantE6.•Confirmation <strong>of</strong> Handover in<strong>for</strong>mation received by mechanicaldesignerDate received• Chlorination certificates• Gas safety certificates & installation line diagram• Life safety ventilation certificate• Dry / Wet riser test certificate• Fire hydrant test certificate• Pressure Systems factory certificatePart 5 | M echanical & Electrical45 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Section 5 - APPENDIX EE7.• COSHH certificates• O&M manuals received• As fitted drawings received• Energy Per<strong>for</strong>mance Building Directive requirements• Building Regulations, Building Log Books(<strong>for</strong> fur<strong>the</strong>r requirements refer to BSRIA (AG 1) & CIBSE (OOM)Confirmation <strong>of</strong> compliance with EN 378, refrigeration systemsE8.Safety InterlocksConfirmation that all plant safety interlocks (and ALL fire damper drop tests) witnessed by mechanicaldesignerE9.Feedback on Contractors usedE10.• Recommended <strong>for</strong> future use ........................................................... (Y/N)Confirmation <strong>of</strong> any significant site changes coordinated with structural engineer and buildingdesignerE11.Contractors contact details <strong>for</strong> defects liability period• BuildingName• MechanicalName• ElectricalNameTelephoneTelephoneTelephonePart 5 | M echanical & Electrical46 | P age


UWE Facilities<strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Lecture Theatre in <strong>the</strong> ECCPart 6Specialist Installations


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>IndexPart 1Part 2Part 3Part 4Part 5IntroductionSpace StandardsGeneral <strong>Design</strong>BC&E RequirementsM&E RequirementsPart 6Specialist InstallationsTypical IT Room6.1 Lifts6.2 IT Cabling Infrastructure6.2.1 Standards6.2.2 UTP Termination and Containment6.2.3 Fibre termination and Containment6.2.4 Outlet labeling Convention <strong>for</strong> Both UPT and Fibre6.2.5 Approved System Manufacturer6.2.6 Communications Rooms General Requirements6.2.7 External Services and Resilience6.2.8 Telephone Services6.2.9 Audio and Visual Equipment6.3 Security & Access Control6.4 External Works6.4.1 General6.4.2 Hard Landscaping Materials6.4.3 S<strong>of</strong>t Landscaping/ Tree Planting6.4.4 Street Furniture6.4.5 External Lighting6.5 Kitchen Fit Out6.5.1 Deli/Café/Bar Style Operation6.5.2 <strong>Design</strong>6.5.3 Finishes6.5.4 Seating Area6.6 Vending Operation6.7 Tea PointsIndex


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>6.1 LiftsProvide lift equipment in accordance with <strong>the</strong> safety requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> appropriate BSEN80/81 Standards and <strong>the</strong> requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Health and Safety Executive and Part M <strong>of</strong>Building Regulations.Accessories; Lift trip counters to be fitted.6.2 IT Cabling Infrastructure6.2.1 StandardsThe three standards are <strong>for</strong>mally titled ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1-2001, -B.2-2001, and-B.3-2001.Any cabling installation will be provided with a manufacturer warranty <strong>for</strong> 25 years.6.2.2 UTP Termination and ContainmentAny UTP data cabling installation will:• Be terminated in <strong>the</strong> communications room on 24 port RJ-45 patch panels• Terminated at <strong>the</strong> outlet on an RJ-45 outlet with spring loaded shutters• Install white plastic outlets in ei<strong>the</strong>r flush mounted wall outlets or within dado trunking• Have charcoal grey identification at <strong>the</strong> outlet in compliance with Part M BuildingRegulations.• The containment will be pervasive, continuous and allow <strong>for</strong> 50% more cables thanoriginally installed.• The containment paths must follow routes in accessible areas, such as corridors.• A blue 3m patch cord to be provided <strong>for</strong> each outlet.6.2.3 Fibre Termination and ContainmentAny fibre optic cable installation will:• Only single mode optical fibre (SM1) to be used.• Fibre optic cables will be terminated as follows into connectors to be specified by ITSdependant on application.• Fibre optic cables are to be installed in 24 way patch panels at <strong>the</strong> top <strong>of</strong>communication cabinets.• The containment will be pervasive, continuous and allow <strong>for</strong> 50% more cables thanoriginally installed. (Containment can be shared between <strong>the</strong> UTP and fibreinstallations)• All fibre optic cable installations are to be tested using OTDR and <strong>the</strong> results suppliedto <strong>the</strong> client after commissioning.6.2.4 Outlet Labelling Convention <strong>for</strong> both UTP and FibreThe following labeling convention will be used <strong>for</strong> labeling <strong>of</strong>f both UTP and fibre systems:• Each outlet, or fibre connector, to be labelled with Black Text on a Yellow Background.• Each <strong>of</strong>fice outlet will identify which communications room it is feed by and <strong>the</strong> outletwithin that communications room. Eg. 2B012/34, <strong>the</strong> 34 th outlet in communicationsroom 2B12.Part 6 | S pecialist Installations1 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>This is as follows:A/x B/xLabel in room A tells you where <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r end <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> cable is terminated, i.e. room B.• The x indicates <strong>the</strong> consecutive number on <strong>the</strong> communications room patch panel,using <strong>the</strong> example above, <strong>the</strong> 34 th outlet in communications room 2B012 that goes toroom 2B062 would be labelled as follows:2B012/34 2B072/34This is labelled outlet 34, no matter if it is <strong>the</strong> first or 34th outlet in <strong>the</strong> room 2B062 so thatevery outlet ID is unique• NOTE : There is no difference between a data socket and a telephone socket. Thedifference is where <strong>the</strong> points are patched in at <strong>the</strong> machine room end.6.2.5 Approved system/manufacturerThe current approved systems/manufacturers <strong>for</strong> UTP and fibre installations are:• Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) - ADC Krone – TrueNet• Fibre (Single and Multimode) - ADC Krone - TrueNet• Blown Fibre(Single and Multimode) - ADC Krone• Alternative fibre manufacturers will be considered6.2.6 Communications Rooms General RequirementsThe communications room must be designed to be a secure area and a suitable size toaccommodate both <strong>the</strong> IT and Security infrastructures. It must be secured with electronicaccess control and also be <strong>of</strong> a suitable size to allow <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> requirements below as well aswall mount <strong>the</strong> security equipment. (See separate security requirements and designsections).The general requirements <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> communications room is:• Data cabling should be terminated on RJ-45 patch panels in cabinets.• Connections from switches to patch panels to made with blue 12cm patch cords.(Patch cords to be included in costs <strong>for</strong> data cabling installation).• All cable management to take place in <strong>the</strong> side voids <strong>of</strong> an 800 cabinet. The space <strong>for</strong><strong>the</strong> switches (see above) is to be totally free <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> installation <strong>of</strong> deep 800mmequipment.• The cabinets are to a minimum <strong>of</strong> 42U in height, exact model <strong>of</strong> cabinet to be specifiedby ITS, this specification is dependent on <strong>the</strong> application:– 800 wide x 1000 deep.– The front and rear doors should be wardrobe doors that are per<strong>for</strong>ated/ventilatedunless sound pro<strong>of</strong>ing cabinets are used.– There should be at least 1m <strong>of</strong> space around <strong>the</strong> cabinet/s on front, 1 side,0back.Part 6 | S pecialist Installations2 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>– Cabinets should be floor standing on plinths.– Power to be supplied by a 10way PDU with current monitoring as a minimum.– 32AMP supply terminated on commando socket.• The size <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> room will depend on <strong>the</strong> number <strong>of</strong> connections required/number <strong>of</strong>cabinets to be installed. A two cabinet installation would typically require a room atleast 3m x 3m.• The rooms should be completed as early as possible in <strong>the</strong> project.• The space will allow <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> installation <strong>of</strong> wall mounted cooling.• The space should be cooled by natural ventilation where possible.• The space should allow <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> installation <strong>of</strong> security systems on <strong>the</strong> wall.• The minimum floor to ceiling height should be <strong>the</strong> height <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> 42U Cabinet + 500mm.• Where communications rooms are vertically aligned within <strong>the</strong> building sufficient fireprotection should be provided between rooms.• Communications rooms should be directly accessible from <strong>the</strong> corridor, and notthrough a store room/classroom etc. Ideally centrally located to reduce number <strong>of</strong>comms rooms.• All UTP cabling runs, back to <strong>the</strong> communications room, must not exceed 90meterslength and pass <strong>the</strong> appropriate cabling tests using a Flux or similar tester. All results tobe supplied to <strong>the</strong> client at <strong>the</strong> completion <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> project.• Patch panels and active equipment (switches) to be installed as figure 1.Figure 1 – Layout <strong>of</strong> switches and patch panels in racks6.2.7 External Services and Resilience• Diverse routes are required <strong>for</strong> service distribution, such as fibre connections. Typicallyroutes would use risers at opposite ends <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building <strong>for</strong> resilience.• External services will be delivered into <strong>the</strong> building. These will require building entrypoints, containment and ducts to <strong>the</strong> communications rooms. Diverse building entrypoints and routes are required.• NJUG National Joint Utilities Group’s guidance should be used <strong>for</strong> installation <strong>of</strong>underground utilities.6.2.8 Telephone ServicesThe normal process <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> deployment <strong>of</strong> telephone services is to use VoIP. There<strong>for</strong>e<strong>the</strong>re is no requirement <strong>for</strong> a dedicated outlet/cabling <strong>for</strong> a telephone handset as long as adata point is available with V0IP support.Part 6 | S pecialist Installations3 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Where a legal requirement necessitates that an emergency telephone handset is required<strong>the</strong>n dedicated telephone cable will be required back to <strong>the</strong> central PABX room. Theseoutlets are to be terminated on RJ-45 patch panels with <strong>the</strong> racks in <strong>the</strong> communicationsrooms.6.2.9 Audio & Visual EquipmentAudio Visual Infrastructure General: The choice <strong>of</strong> AV infrastructure employed shall bedetermined by <strong>the</strong> type <strong>of</strong> electrical installation to be provided within <strong>the</strong> rooms. UWE willrequire <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> ei<strong>the</strong>r surface mounted using compartmentalised containment or conduittubing if <strong>the</strong> accessory plates are mounted flush with <strong>the</strong> wall.The design team should take into account UWE audio visual requirements, which willencompass fur<strong>the</strong>r detailed design later within <strong>the</strong> design process.6.3 Security and Access ControlUWE is generally open to <strong>the</strong> public and operates 24/7 so this raises security issues andsome areas require security <strong>of</strong> varying standards according to need. This is generallyprovided by access control and camera supervision alongside <strong>the</strong> entry and movement orintruder detection systems throughout <strong>the</strong> sites.Any new works and schemes should be discussed with <strong>the</strong> Security Manager to ensure that<strong>the</strong> project is in line with <strong>the</strong> correct level <strong>of</strong> control and security <strong>for</strong> that space. All schemesshould ensure that <strong>the</strong> containment <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> above is included and co-ordinated with <strong>the</strong> rest<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> works. For all cases, a detailed site specific assessment is required to determine<strong>the</strong> level <strong>of</strong> security. This is to be led by <strong>the</strong> Security Manager at UWE and discussion with<strong>the</strong> occupying clients.6.4 External Works6.4.1 GeneralThe designers approach to <strong>the</strong> public realm and external space ingeneral should be to creating useful spaces which accommodate<strong>the</strong> necessary functions <strong>of</strong> urban life and living. The external areasshould provide safe linkages to existing areas/features, safe areasto sit and congregate. All spaces should be designed to bewelcoming and <strong>of</strong> high quality that encourage <strong>the</strong>ir use.This identify can be fur<strong>the</strong>r developed through <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> variationsin <strong>the</strong> visual character, orientation, scale, dimensions utilizedthrough to <strong>the</strong> choice <strong>of</strong> materials <strong>for</strong> both hard and s<strong>of</strong>tlandscaping.The design team should take into consideration that UWE will beseeking to incorporate any future environmental developments andbest practice into <strong>the</strong>ir design guide covering external spaces. Thedesign team must consider and be able to demonstrate that <strong>the</strong>yhave taken <strong>the</strong> future management <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> external spaces intoconsideration during <strong>the</strong> design process and as a result <strong>for</strong>mulatean external spaces management plan <strong>for</strong> future maintenance andupkeep.Part 6 | S pecialist Installations4 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>6.4.2 Hard Landscaping MaterialsAny hard landscaping materials should be selected to reflect <strong>the</strong> local aes<strong>the</strong>ticsurroundings with a contemporary feel. General surfaces to combine smooth slab pavingand textured blocks where appropriate.6.4.3 S<strong>of</strong>t landscaping / Tree plantingTree planning should be adopted in future developments where appropriate to s<strong>of</strong>ten <strong>the</strong>outline <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> built <strong>for</strong>m. Tree selection should be on <strong>the</strong> basis <strong>of</strong> appropriate <strong>for</strong>m andgrowing habit, but all to be clear stem to allow visual sightlines to be maintained.6.4.4 Street FurnitureThe selection <strong>of</strong> street furniture should be robust with a contemporary design. Wherepossible any proposed street furniture should be integrated into designed elements, suchas paving bands. The design team must ensure that adequate cycle & motorcycle storagefacilities are provided <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> design <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> specific project in accordance with industryaccepted design principles and industry/local authority requirements.6.5 Kitchen Fit Out6.5.1 Deli /Café /Bar Style Operation6.5.2 <strong>Design</strong>The guideline will enable <strong>the</strong> main aspects <strong>of</strong> design to be considered in developing a brief<strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> design <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> style <strong>of</strong> catering operation.Considerations will be given to:-• <strong>Design</strong>• General layout and room specifications• Service Style• Mechanical and Electrical to include IT and phone lines• General Service Requirements• FinishesThe design <strong>of</strong> modern retail Deli/Cafe catering outlet should only be undertaken by aspecialist catering <strong>Design</strong> Company with experience in delivering a “Turnkey” package.A detailed brief can be provided by <strong>the</strong> client utilising this guideline as basis on which tocommence <strong>the</strong> design process.This process ensures that <strong>the</strong> design is Client based with a full understanding <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>commercial aspects and technical issues demanded from <strong>the</strong> proposed outlet.The Outlets should be so designed to create a modern bright space with <strong>the</strong> emphasis on ade-skilled or semi skilled food production, and able to <strong>of</strong>fer a range <strong>of</strong> quality light meals,snacks, sandwiches and beverages. Consideration to design if location to be licensed <strong>for</strong><strong>the</strong> sale <strong>of</strong> alcoholGeneral Layout and Room SpecificationsThe operation will ideally be a self sufficient unit but could be partly supplied via a largerlocal central catering operation.Part 6 | S pecialist Installations5 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Stores <strong>for</strong> storage <strong>of</strong> back up stock would be required as will modular refrigeration andfreezer units.Ventilated dry storage should be provided with adequate shelving space <strong>for</strong> holding stockequivalent to 30 days.Modular cold storage units would ideally be divided into three areas, High risk storage, lowrisk storage and freezer storage. This facilitates <strong>the</strong> implementation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> food handlingelements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> food safety act.Depending on style an area would also be required <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> Chef Manager to receive goodsand to conduct cashing up. This would normally be sited close to <strong>the</strong> entry point <strong>for</strong> goods.There will only be a limited use <strong>of</strong> crockery with disposables being used in <strong>the</strong> main. Adishwasher system however maybe required <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> washing <strong>of</strong> crockery and utensils andthis should be sited within an area away from food preparation areas.This operation will produce waste and <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e, consideration should be given toseparating food waste from waste that can be recycled.Waste areas should be identified as under counter and external recyclable waste bins.External enclosed bin areas should be considered within <strong>the</strong> design or have a holdingfacility away from food preparation areas whereby waste can be stored prior to being takento main waste storage areas.A separate lockable COSHH cupboard with shelving and Belfast bucket sinks should beprovided <strong>for</strong> cleaning and chemicals.Kitchen <strong>Design</strong>The operation is dependent upon a minimum <strong>of</strong> food being prepared on site and <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e<strong>the</strong> space required is relevant to <strong>the</strong> operation. However, sufficient space should be givento produce food in a safe and organised manner maintaining separate areas <strong>for</strong> high andlow risk food preparation.The operation should allow raw and cooked foods to be prepared in separate areas, havingdedicated refrigeration, sinks and prep benches <strong>for</strong> those areas.Cooking equipment should be adequate <strong>for</strong> use, with <strong>the</strong> extra ability to meet demands <strong>for</strong>increased business. Low intensity food production methods are advised <strong>for</strong> Deli/Cafe/Barstyle food operation refrigeration and oven and frying equipment to be selected <strong>for</strong> purpose<strong>of</strong> design. Extraction fan to be fit <strong>for</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong> selected equipment.A balance <strong>of</strong> equipment power requirements should be achieved with a view to having amix <strong>of</strong> gas and electrical cooking equipment. Additional electrical power to be available <strong>for</strong>any future additional equipment needed.Separate sinks are required <strong>for</strong> food use and cleaning use.Adequate hand wash sinks are required.The catering environment to be temperature controlled with adequate fresh air make upand if feasible adequate natural light.Part 6 | S pecialist Installations6 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>All finishes within <strong>the</strong> service area should be <strong>of</strong> an impervious nature and cleanable with <strong>the</strong>ability to be regularly sanitized.Service Style6.5.3 FinishesOperation is relatively low skilled with <strong>the</strong> emphasis being placed upon low intensity foodproduction.The main service counter would be approximately 6metres in length with a back counteraround <strong>the</strong> same. Again this would depend on location and space availableSpace should be given to chilled ambient, hot, option and retail space <strong>for</strong> grab and go.The design elements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> flow <strong>of</strong> customers should be considered to reduce dwell timeand queuing issues. This may affect <strong>the</strong> type <strong>of</strong> c<strong>of</strong>fee machines utilised which could be selfservice, barista style or bean to cup.Consideration should be given to <strong>the</strong> careful management <strong>of</strong> staffing levels required tooperate <strong>the</strong> food service points. Staff should be able to migrate between counters duringquieter periods. Staff should be adequately trained in all areas <strong>of</strong> food production andservice.The food service counters should include;-• Limited hot section Chilled Deli and salad section Hot Snacks• Grab and go, with easy access to tills <strong>for</strong> speed <strong>of</strong> service to include-cold drinkssandwiches and boxed salads etc• Quality c<strong>of</strong>fee and hot beverage <strong>of</strong>fer on back or front counter• Each area <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> counter outlet will serve and display from ei<strong>the</strong>r hot (dry heated solidtops) or cold (chilled self selection and served) units. This could be <strong>of</strong> a mobile nature<strong>for</strong> use elsewhere or fixed as part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> shop fitting.• Space on <strong>the</strong> counter and <strong>the</strong>ir approaches should provide <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> merchandising <strong>of</strong>trading up items. Each outlet will require power and data connections to operate POSsystems and widescreen confirmation <strong>of</strong> service times and menu <strong>of</strong>feringsConsideration should be taken in applying <strong>the</strong> selection <strong>of</strong> kitchen finishes in order toensure compliance with health and safety and <strong>the</strong> food safety act.Ceiling finishes should have a plastic faced cleanable tile on a white corrosion resistantgrid. A 600mm 2 grid is advisable. Light fittings should be enclosed vapour pro<strong>of</strong> fittings withdiffusers fitted in to <strong>the</strong> ceiling grid.Floors should be anti-slip vinyl or quartz screed with 120-150mm coved edges.Wall finishes should be <strong>of</strong> a cleanable and impervious nature Whiterock sheeting with anintegral biocide is advised.Doors should be manufactured with cleanable laminate surfaces.All paint surfaces should be ei<strong>the</strong>r low VOC gloss or eggshell.Food server counters should be manufactured in stainless steel with decorative polymercounter tops or granite, and have decorative laminates to <strong>the</strong> front facing elevations.Part 6 | S pecialist Installations7 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Impulse space should be designed in to <strong>the</strong> counter along with an element <strong>of</strong> retail.Back counters should be manufactured in stainless steel with stainless steel work surfaces.Social spaces should have a variety <strong>of</strong> seating which would suit <strong>the</strong> varied dining styles<strong>of</strong>fered.6.5.4 Seating areaThe mix <strong>of</strong> seating ideally would include fixed seating, breakfast bars and s<strong>of</strong>t seatingareas.The colour scheme should be so designed as to create a bright and airy environment with<strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> neutral tones accented with stronger feature colours.Flooring to be cleanable and possibly include some carpeted areas where s<strong>of</strong>t seating ispresent.The use <strong>of</strong> audio visual facilities should be utilised within <strong>the</strong> space <strong>for</strong> in<strong>for</strong>mationpurposes, <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e data cables would be required in those areas.6.6 Vending OperationGeneralThe intention <strong>of</strong> this guideline is to seek to provide a modern efficient Vending Service.This guideline will enable <strong>the</strong> main aspects <strong>of</strong> design to be considered in developing a brief<strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> design <strong>of</strong> a Vending Operation.Vending can be used to capture sales in areas <strong>of</strong> significant footfall or designed to providean additional out <strong>of</strong> hour’s service to back up retail catering operations.It can fur<strong>the</strong>r be used to provide a service in remotely located areas away from <strong>the</strong> mainCatering operationsConsiderations will be given to -• <strong>Design</strong>• Mechanical and Electrical• General Service Requirements<strong>Design</strong>The design <strong>of</strong> a retail Vending Operation should only be undertaken by a specialist inSupplying Vending or a catering design company with experience in delivering such aservice.A detailed brief can be provided by <strong>the</strong> client utilising this guideline as basis on which tocommence <strong>the</strong> design process.This process ensures that <strong>the</strong> design is client based with a full understanding <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>commercial aspects and technical issues demanded from <strong>the</strong> proposed outlet. The Outletsshould be so designed to create a discreet vending operation which is carefully sited andfits well within a given social space.Part 6 | S pecialist Installations8 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>A Vending operation will require <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> a remote storage facility sufficiently largeenough to hold back up stock particularly where <strong>the</strong> supply <strong>of</strong> chilled drinks are requiredthrough vending. Space is also required <strong>for</strong> storage <strong>of</strong> hot beverage product and drinkscups.It may be that chilled back up space is required where sandwich and chilled snack are heldin situations where <strong>the</strong> vending machines are stocked more than once per day.The stores should be adequately lit and well ventilated. Dry storage should be provided withadequate space <strong>for</strong> holding stock equivalent to 3-5 days.All stock is subject to <strong>the</strong> requirements <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> food safety act.Vending produces waste and <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e, consideration should be given <strong>the</strong> provision <strong>of</strong>separating wet waste from waste that can be recycled. To this effect consider <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong>waste and recycling units adjacent to <strong>the</strong> vending area.General Service RequirementsThe <strong>University</strong> Health and Safety Advisor should be consulted at an early stage <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>design process to ensure that <strong>the</strong> vending is not sited so to cause any restriction or hazardin public spaces and will satisfy statutory regulations.Social spaces may be adjacent to <strong>the</strong> vending and consideration should be given to avariety <strong>of</strong> seating which would suit <strong>the</strong> operation.Vending is <strong>of</strong>ten best placed within a shop fitted housing which can be designed and built tocomplement <strong>the</strong> local scheme.Consider <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> anti-slip flooring to <strong>the</strong> area immediately in front <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> vendingmachines due to <strong>the</strong> potential slip hazard created by spillage.6.7 Tea PointsTea points are required within large <strong>of</strong>fice areas and will be an area <strong>of</strong> 4m 2 and will consist<strong>of</strong> Vinyl flooring, overhead and under counter storage, sink, fridge dishwasher and fridge.Part 6 | S pecialist Installations9 | P age


This page is intentionally blank


UWE Facilities<strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>R Block Phase 2 completed 2010Part 7Wayfinding


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>IndexPart 1Part 2Part 3Part 4Part 5Part 6Part 7IntroductionSpace StandardsGeneral <strong>Design</strong>B&CE RequirementsM&E RequirementsSpecialist InstallationsWayfindingIntroduction to UWE7.0 WAYFINDING PRINCIPLE 1 INCLUSIVE DESIGN7.0.1 Inclusive <strong>Design</strong> Issues: Needs, Circumstances and Pr<strong>of</strong>iles7.0.2 Modes <strong>of</strong> travel7.0.3 Size and Type <strong>of</strong> Transport7.0.4 Means <strong>of</strong> Navigation7.0.5 Methods <strong>of</strong> Navigation7.0.6 Inclusive <strong>Design</strong>: Campus Observations7.0.7 Inclusive <strong>Design</strong>: Fundamental Principles7.0.8 Inclusive <strong>Design</strong>: <strong>Design</strong> Solutions7.1 WAY-FINDING PRINCIPLES: SITE CIRCULATION7.1.1 Site Circulation Fundamental Principles7.1.2 Site Circulation: <strong>Design</strong> Solutions7.1.3 Site Circulation: Materials Specification7.2 GRAPHIC DESIGN7.2.1 Formal Way-finding Signage7.2.2 Graphic <strong>Design</strong>: Signage Parameters7.3 TECHNICAL ANNEX7.3.1 Circulation spaces and routes7.3.2 Materials Specification7.3.3 Nodes and intersections7.3.4 Street Furniture7.3.5 Assessment Tool7.3.6 Circulation spaces and routes7.4 EXTERNAL SIGNAGE GUIDELINES7.4.1 Introduction / Purpose7.4.2 External Vehicular Signage7.4.3 External Pedestrian Signage7.4.4 Maps7.4.5 Finger Boards7.4.6 Entrance Fixed Signage:Comment on <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>This <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> and <strong>the</strong> associated suite <strong>of</strong> documents have been produced to assist externaldesign consultants in <strong>the</strong>ir designs <strong>for</strong> all UWE properties and is based on past UWE experiences. Itdoes not absolve external design consultants <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir legal or contractual responsibilities under healthand safety legislation, statutory requirements or design liability.Index


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>INTRODUCTIONThe Way-finding <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> is not only based upon <strong>the</strong> fundamental principles whichcontribute towards a legible and permeable site, but also refers to issues facing <strong>the</strong><strong>University</strong> in line with <strong>the</strong> move towards a master planned campus.This guide <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e sets out to demonstrate how visual connectivity and ef<strong>for</strong>tlesscirculation between destinations across <strong>the</strong> campus can be achieved. Each sectionresponds to issues identified by a detailed site analysis, establishes design principles and aseries <strong>of</strong> “best practice” typical details culminating in way-finding that goes un-noticed untilneeded.To support <strong>the</strong>se details a restricted suite <strong>of</strong> hard and s<strong>of</strong>t materials has been establishedto create a consistent “brand image” and landscape character across <strong>the</strong> site. Thiscontinuity would result in a public realm which is attractive, easily maintained and adaptablein <strong>the</strong> future. The selective palettes have been identified to allow <strong>for</strong> flexibility in <strong>the</strong> layingout and general arrangement <strong>of</strong> materials and allow a degree <strong>of</strong> variation in <strong>the</strong> treatment <strong>of</strong><strong>the</strong> public realm. A balance is required so as not to generate sterile or uni<strong>for</strong>m designsolution in all cases. Careful use and application <strong>of</strong> appropriate materials and features froma suite available to design teams will create a locally distinctive but clearly UWE brandacross <strong>the</strong> campus.This guide <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e establishes unifying solutions which will provide <strong>the</strong> setting <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong><strong>for</strong>mal and in<strong>for</strong>mal way-finding elements which will be applied to future designs onFrenchay CampusThe guide is not intended to be a treatise on design, but provides clarity about <strong>the</strong> designintent and <strong>the</strong> way <strong>the</strong> Campus Way-finding can be improved.Part 7 | W ayfinding1 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>7.0.0 WAY-FINDING PRINCIPLE 1: INCLUSIVE DESIGN7.0.1 Inclusive <strong>Design</strong> Issues: Needs, Circumstances and Pr<strong>of</strong>ilesThe importance <strong>of</strong> consultation, review and impact assessments <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> design <strong>of</strong> newroutes cannot be underestimated. This is because legislation and best practice placeresponsibilities upon UWE in relation to how it manages its environment <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> benefits <strong>of</strong>visitors and users. Future design teams will <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e need to demonstrate that aconsultative, review and impact assessment methodology has been followed that takes intoaccount UWE stakeholder observations.The following range <strong>of</strong> needs, circumstances, and pr<strong>of</strong>iles, should be taken into accountwhen preparing detailed design schemes.NeedsIndividuals can be described as having a range or combination <strong>of</strong> needs pertinent to <strong>the</strong>design and management <strong>of</strong> both internal and external environments:Universal needs – recognizing that everyone has basic needs, many <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se areaddressed by attending to <strong>the</strong> following specific needs;Cognitive needs – individuals respond differently to <strong>the</strong> environment <strong>the</strong>y find <strong>the</strong>mselvesin: some have more specific needs that necessitate <strong>the</strong> availability <strong>of</strong> tranquil spaces andhighly legible surroundings;Hearing needs – a number <strong>of</strong> individuals may not able to make use <strong>of</strong> audible signals <strong>of</strong>danger and can become particularly vulnerable to vehicle movement and especially cyclemovement. It is <strong>the</strong>re<strong>for</strong>e necessary to distinguish between pedestrian only routes androutes used by vehicles and cyclists. These include providing distinctive surface treatmentsbetween shared or segregated routes;Visual needs – some people are not able to navigate environments, without ei<strong>the</strong>r clearvisual in<strong>for</strong>mation, in <strong>the</strong> way <strong>of</strong> tonal contrast and good lighting; whilst o<strong>the</strong>rs requirephysical and tactile in<strong>for</strong>mation in order to navigate <strong>the</strong> same environments;Mobility needs – some people find movement around an environment difficult and willelect to use <strong>the</strong> most effective modes <strong>of</strong> mobility to get <strong>the</strong>m from one place to ano<strong>the</strong>r,such as cars, hand-powered cycles, wheelchairs or walking with or without mobility aids,and will seek out routes that minimize <strong>the</strong>ir expenditure <strong>of</strong> energy and provide <strong>the</strong>m withopportunities to rest when necessary;Metabolism needs – some people have needs that are best described as relating to <strong>the</strong>irinner functions, many <strong>of</strong> which can be managed and do not require significant provision in<strong>the</strong> way <strong>of</strong> design, o<strong>the</strong>r than to say that in<strong>for</strong>mation with regards <strong>the</strong> whereabouts <strong>of</strong>facilities such as toilets can be particularly beneficial.CircumstancesIndividuals can be described as having a range <strong>of</strong> needs arising from differingcircumstances:Age – a variety <strong>of</strong> persons <strong>of</strong> ages with prevalence <strong>of</strong> differing needs will be present at <strong>the</strong>university <strong>for</strong> 351 days <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> year. Although <strong>the</strong> majority <strong>of</strong> students on campus could beexpected to be young adults, <strong>the</strong>re will also be school age children, staff and maturePart 7 | W ayfinding2 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>students. Conference delegates will range in age. O<strong>the</strong>rs will have brought in children –particularly those who are making use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> campus nursery facilities. The opening up <strong>of</strong><strong>the</strong> Campus and its specialist and community facilities to adjacent residential developmentswill also attract a spectrum <strong>of</strong> people <strong>for</strong> a number <strong>of</strong> disparate reasons;Stress – stress is not uncommon, especially as exam time approaches, such that <strong>the</strong>opportunity to find tranquil environments can become especially welcome;Pregnancy – pregnancy brings particular needs <strong>for</strong> which ease <strong>of</strong> movement an opportunityto find resting places are also welcome;Injury – everyone can experience particular need as a result <strong>of</strong> injury, no one is immune;Emergence Evacuation – <strong>the</strong>re will be an expectation that if <strong>the</strong>re is an emergencyevacuation that <strong>the</strong>re will be suitable spaces at a safe distance from <strong>the</strong> building <strong>for</strong>assembly whilst awaiting fur<strong>the</strong>r help or instruction.Pr<strong>of</strong>ilePeople traversing <strong>the</strong> campus will fall into two main pr<strong>of</strong>iles:Visitors and <strong>the</strong> Public – <strong>for</strong> whom one will have little or no prior awareness but <strong>for</strong> whom<strong>the</strong> UWE has an anticipatory duty to consider and accommodate <strong>the</strong>ir needs under <strong>the</strong>equalities legislation;Students and Staff – <strong>for</strong> whom one will have more in<strong>for</strong>mation and <strong>for</strong> whom UWE will haveresponsibilities under particular parts <strong>of</strong> equalities legislation pertaining to employment and<strong>the</strong> provision <strong>of</strong> education.7.0.2 Modes <strong>of</strong> travelIn preparing schemes, designers must take into account <strong>the</strong> various modes <strong>of</strong> travel, <strong>the</strong>relationship between modes <strong>of</strong> travel, and <strong>the</strong> means <strong>of</strong> navigation that people make use <strong>of</strong>across <strong>the</strong> Campus. Staff, students and visitors will elect to use different modes <strong>of</strong> travel toand/or around <strong>the</strong> campus. These could include:Public Transport – a significant bus interchange will remain on site, with plans <strong>for</strong> a busbased rapid transit scheme to emerge, subject to funding. These modes will be used bythose seeking to move about <strong>the</strong> campus by foot or wheelchair, and as such <strong>the</strong> design <strong>of</strong>stops need to take account <strong>of</strong> pavement to vehicle transitions and <strong>the</strong> in<strong>for</strong>mation availableto aid navigation both on and <strong>of</strong>f site;Foot – it is anticipated that most people will move about <strong>the</strong> Campus on foot, making <strong>the</strong>availability <strong>of</strong> easily navigated and travelled pedestrian routes a priority;Wheelchair – some people will wish to make use <strong>of</strong> wheelchairs with <strong>the</strong> majority <strong>of</strong> users,but not everyone, electing to use electric wheelchairs or mobility buggies in order toovercome <strong>the</strong> significant distances and vertical changes in level -necessitating welldesigned routes that are conducive to movement via wheelchair;Cycle – many people will elect to move about by cycle, including hand-powered cycles –necessitating provision that does not bring <strong>the</strong>m into conflict with pedestrians and allows<strong>the</strong>m to park in safe and secure places that do not give rise to obstructing <strong>the</strong> safenavigation by o<strong>the</strong>r users;Part 7 | W ayfinding3 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Car – some people with mobility impairment will elect to move about by car and will need t<strong>of</strong>ind locations close to each building where <strong>the</strong>y are able to park;Van and Lorry – Drivers <strong>of</strong> delivery vehicles or contractor vehicles may be one time onlyvisitors. They will need to find <strong>the</strong>ir destination, park, undertake <strong>the</strong>ir activity and departfrom <strong>the</strong> campus without difficulty. Contractors undertaking long term work will be expectedto drop-<strong>of</strong>f tools and equipment close to <strong>the</strong>ir workplace, but park in university car parks;Specialist Vehicles – There will be occasion when specialist vehicles will be used, <strong>for</strong>example fire tender and ambulance <strong>for</strong> emergencies, cranes <strong>for</strong> maintenance and futuredevelopment. The need <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> future use <strong>of</strong> specialist vehicle access must be consideredat design stage sufficient space to maneuver and operate must be allowed <strong>for</strong>.7.0.3 Size and Type <strong>of</strong> TransportHand in hand with modes <strong>of</strong> travel will be <strong>the</strong> size and type <strong>of</strong> vehicle used. <strong>Design</strong>ers willhave to consider <strong>the</strong>se in <strong>the</strong>ir designs taking into account <strong>the</strong> following:Size – in this context <strong>the</strong> vehicle size can be associated with destination. Busses/coachesto <strong>the</strong> Transport hub or bus stop, taxi’s to taxi rank, cars to car parks, cycles to cycle parks,delivery vehicles to Loading/Delivery bays (Mail, catering, retail) and contractors’ vehiclesto construction site. But <strong>the</strong>y also vary in size and weight and so allowance <strong>for</strong> vehicles upto <strong>the</strong> maximum weight and size allowed on roads must be made.Type – <strong>the</strong> type <strong>of</strong> vehicle will, in most cases, be associated with size. But in this context,allowance <strong>for</strong> electric powered cars and wheelchairs must be considered. For example,charging points, and whe<strong>the</strong>r having <strong>the</strong>se will encourage drivers/users to change to <strong>the</strong>seif on-site charging is provided.7.0.4 Means <strong>of</strong> NavigationPeople will elect to use different means <strong>of</strong> navigation to arrive at and move around <strong>the</strong>campus. These include:Visual & Architectural – most people will utilize visual in<strong>for</strong>mation in order to navigate anenvironment, which will be greatly assisted by good lighting and tonal contrast, but willsignificantly benefit from <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> architectural signals that contribute to not only toidentifying entrances to destinations, but contributing to <strong>the</strong> sense <strong>of</strong> distinguishable placeson route;Audible – most people who have usable hearing will unconsciously use audible in<strong>for</strong>mationto alert <strong>the</strong>m to hazards that <strong>the</strong>y have not seen, whilst people with visual impairments willuse sound not only to detect hazards, but to add to <strong>the</strong>ir sense <strong>of</strong> place.7.0.5 Methods <strong>of</strong> NavigationFur<strong>the</strong>r to 7.0.4, people will rely on different methods <strong>of</strong> navigation to arrive at and movearound <strong>the</strong> campusFixed – <strong>the</strong>se will be sign posts or sign boards with text or imagesElectronic – <strong>the</strong>se will be home/work computer internet maps or textual directions, orin<strong>for</strong>mation received over mobile devices. Future development <strong>of</strong>, and use <strong>of</strong>, electronicnavigations aids <strong>for</strong> mobile devices used by both able and sensory impaired persons mustbe considered in developing wayfinding.Part 7 | W ayfinding4 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>7.0.6 Inclusive <strong>Design</strong>: Campus ObservationsTactile – many people with visual impairments use physical entities, such as kerb lines,building edges and tactile surfaces to navigate through environments, with clearlydistinguishable path edges being a primary means by which cane and guide dog userstrack <strong>the</strong>ir routes through <strong>the</strong> environment;Signage – clearly understood and interpreted environments are necessary within complexenvironments in order that people may plan <strong>the</strong>ir most efficient routes;Assistive – some people seek <strong>the</strong> assistance <strong>of</strong> o<strong>the</strong>rs, guide dogs or technology tonavigate environments, which can have a significant bearing on how <strong>the</strong> UWE manage <strong>the</strong>campus environment and enable such <strong>for</strong>ms <strong>of</strong> assistance to work.Frenchay campus straddles a “spinal ridge” and Topography challenges exist to breach thisridge. Routes can ei<strong>the</strong>r broadly follow contours or cut across <strong>the</strong>m: in certain instances,<strong>the</strong>re is little choice open to designers. Those routes that run parallel with <strong>the</strong> crest <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ridge are generally more conducive to movement, whilst those routes that traverse <strong>the</strong> ridgecan pose <strong>the</strong> greatest challenge, unless earthworks and cut and fill strategies are adopted.These can be effective, but costly.There are points on certain routes that pose particular challenges and make continuity <strong>of</strong>travel problematic <strong>for</strong> people with mobility impairment: Most routes lack resting places andsome environments do not exploit <strong>the</strong> opportunity to find tranquillity.Many vehicle access/control barriers present problems owing to <strong>the</strong>ir location, <strong>the</strong>ir design<strong>for</strong> operation and <strong>the</strong> difficulty associated with communicating with site security staff.Navigation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> environment is <strong>of</strong>ten hindered by insufficient visual clarity, whilst <strong>the</strong>introduction <strong>of</strong> way finding signage is enabling better route planning.Several routes do not provide continuous physical, tactile and visual way-finding clues.There will remain a need to ensure that people with sensory impairments are able tonavigate <strong>the</strong> environment with sufficient confidence and to distinguish between pedestrianonly surfaces and routes also traversed by cars and cyclists.7.0.7 Inclusive <strong>Design</strong>: Fundamental PrinciplesThe essence <strong>of</strong> successful way-finding will be <strong>the</strong> ability to create and manage anenvironment that is responsive to individuals’ diverse needs, circumstances and pr<strong>of</strong>iles. Inrelation to preparing a detailed scheme design, <strong>the</strong>re are a number <strong>of</strong> ways in whichdesigners can respond to <strong>the</strong>se high level issues. The evaluation tool presented at 7.3.5provides <strong>the</strong> opportunity <strong>for</strong> designers to justify deign approaches in relation to <strong>the</strong> followinginclusive design criteria:Logistics: The necessity to plan ones movement to avoid protracted or problematic routesto destinations;Legibility: The necessity to achieve clear, logical and efficient navigation through anenvironment;Clarity: The necessity to make sense <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> visual and audible in<strong>for</strong>mation available withinan environment;Tranquillity: The need to find alternatives to places <strong>of</strong> high sensory or social intensity;Part 7 | W ayfinding5 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Ergonomics: The need <strong>for</strong> taking account <strong>of</strong> differing dexterity, size, ability and / or needwhen incorporating any physical feature;Desirable: The need to arrive at equitable solutions evident as a result <strong>of</strong> devising elegantsolutions that include provision <strong>for</strong> people’s different needs;Enjoyable: The aim <strong>of</strong> designing and implementing a scheme design so that enjoymentcan be experienced by everyone.These issues become increasingly relevant when <strong>the</strong> challenging topography <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> UWENew Campus is bought into play. See Figure.Part 7 | W ayfinding6 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Part 7 | W ayfinding 7 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>7.0.8 Inclusive <strong>Design</strong>: <strong>Design</strong> SolutionsAttractive, functional and inclusive design solutions can be achieved by a wide range <strong>of</strong>measures, interventions and thoughtful design approach. Amongst <strong>the</strong> range <strong>of</strong>approaches that can be taken include:• Creating mental links with an identifiable network <strong>of</strong> routes, nodes, levels, principle site(and floor level) datum etc;• locating vehicle arrival points close to buildings <strong>for</strong> individuals reliant on <strong>the</strong>ir cars <strong>for</strong>mobility;• securing connections between level routes using well graded connections;• aligning external routes with internal lifts in order to achieve vertical bridges betweenlevels;• designing in stepped alternatives to ramped routes where possible;• provision <strong>of</strong> regular pedestrian and wheelchair user resting points, especially wheregradients are steeper;• procuring seating that provides appropriate physical support;• identifying opportunities <strong>for</strong> finding tranquillity, especially where routes pass throughareas that lend <strong>the</strong>mselves to such opportunities;• accepting that a distinct relationship between pedestrian preference routes and vehiclepreference routes is required, so that those who are especially vulnerable to vehicleand cycle movement are able to navigate with some knowledge as to where <strong>the</strong>y are inrelation to <strong>the</strong>se o<strong>the</strong>r modes <strong>of</strong> travel;• ensuring clarity and visual definition between objects and between modes <strong>of</strong> travel;• designing linear edges and optimum kerb definitions between vehicle routes and those<strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> pedestrian;• incorporating tactile in<strong>for</strong>mation across open areas so as to facilitate navigation bypeople with visual impairments;• devising lighting strategies that illuminate surfaces and objects without placing sourcewithin <strong>the</strong> centre <strong>of</strong> one’s visual field;• rolling out branded signage that takes on board <strong>the</strong> UWE signage strategy principles.Part 7 | W ayfinding8 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Part 7 | W ayfinding 9 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>7.1.0 WAY-FINDING PRINCIPLES: SITE CIRCULATION7.1.1 Site Circulation Fundamental PrinciplesThe site analysis phase, summarisedin <strong>the</strong> observations above, havehelped to identify a number <strong>of</strong>fundamental design principles thatshould be considered whenpreparing new or enhanced routes aspart <strong>of</strong> a managed implementationprogramme. The following principlesare developed fur<strong>the</strong>r latter in thisguide.Establish pedestrian priority across<strong>the</strong> campus, principally within <strong>the</strong>central core and served by clear anddirect routes from peripheral carparking areas.Define a character type <strong>for</strong> eachroute within <strong>the</strong> hierarchy. This would<strong>of</strong>fer consistency and aid orientationbetween main entrances, studenthousing, academic and welfarefacilities.Differentiate pedestrian andcycle zones along routeswhere both share space.Examples <strong>of</strong> Variances in Surface Treatment to Aid NavigationEstablish minimum dimensions andmaximum gradients along routes to deliver an inclusive environment, accessible to all.Use a restricted palette, or suite, <strong>of</strong> materials, whilst allowing opportunities <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong>irapplication in a varied way along routes and in respite and/or event spaces.Promote quality in <strong>the</strong> public realm. Through concentrating quality materials in key spacesand provide landscape events. Provide respite <strong>for</strong> pedestrians by means <strong>of</strong> seating, shelterand landscape interventions, particularly along lengthy routes between key destinations.Promote visual links and connections along <strong>the</strong> primary and secondary routes to aidnavigation, legibility and mental mapping.Restrict tree planting to s<strong>of</strong>t landscape areas and out <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> way <strong>of</strong> circulation routes.7.1.2 Site Circulation: <strong>Design</strong> SolutionsSet out in Section 7.3 are a number <strong>of</strong> potential detailed design solutions relating toprimary, secondary and tertiary routes, and <strong>the</strong>ir intersections. These are presented in as atechnical annex <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> benefit <strong>of</strong> future design teams interested in <strong>the</strong> delivery <strong>of</strong> technicalsolutions across <strong>the</strong> Campus. The <strong>University</strong> would expect design teams to apply <strong>the</strong>principles in <strong>the</strong>se diagrams to <strong>the</strong>ir respective routes, explaining and justifying instanceswhere deviation is required to deliver a particular solution. The <strong>University</strong> may wish toPart 7 | W ayfinding10 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>collate alternative practical design solutions to aid future route designs which share acommon characteristic or challenge not <strong>for</strong>eseen in this <strong>Guide</strong>.Section 7.3.1 covers <strong>the</strong> following:• Shared routes (pedestrian, cyclist and restricted vehicle movements) along primaryroutes – two options <strong>for</strong> surface treatments.• Principal pedestrian and cyclist routes (segregated) – two options <strong>for</strong> surfacetreatments.• Secondary pedestrian routes – paved and resin bound options• Tertiary pedestrian routes• Cycle only route• Vehicular routes (to main car parks and “link” road connecting <strong>the</strong> Nor<strong>the</strong>rn Gate to <strong>the</strong>internal UWE Service (spine road) *• Service trenchesIt is important to note that South Gloucestershire Council have identified a wish to deliver abus based rapid transit system in <strong>the</strong> Bristol North Fringe. The 2009 UWE masterplanidentifies a potential route through <strong>the</strong> central spine <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> site, running from <strong>the</strong> North Gateto S block and <strong>the</strong>n using <strong>the</strong> East Gate, with a secondary route entering <strong>the</strong> Campus closeto S Block from <strong>the</strong> west, also using <strong>the</strong> East Gate. The Council has identified a need <strong>for</strong> an11m corridor to serve this requirement. Detailed designs <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong>se access corridors willneed to be developed, if required, through a collaborative approach between UWE and <strong>the</strong>Council, responding to issues such as intersections with pedestrian routes (as shown on<strong>the</strong> Test Route) and bus stopping points and associated facilities.7.1.3 Site Circulation: Materials SpecificationSection 7.3.2 and <strong>the</strong> table below identifies a restricted palette <strong>of</strong> surface materials to beused across <strong>the</strong> Campus. Commentary is provided here in relation to <strong>the</strong> suitableapplication <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> materials in relation to <strong>the</strong> hierarchy <strong>of</strong> routes, or o<strong>the</strong>r factors affecting<strong>the</strong>ir use.Currently under reviewRoute/Space Surface Treatment EdgingShared surface Clay Block paving/Dutchpavers (if surface vehicular)PrinciplePrincipleClay block pavingPedestrian RouteSecondary Clay block paving / ResinPedestrian Route boundTertiaryResin boundPedestrian RouteFeatured Spaces Natural Stone Paving n/aServices Trench Gravel n/aFig 15: Application <strong>of</strong> Restricted Palette <strong>of</strong> MaterialsWide Top Concrete EdgingKerbWide Top Concrete EdgingKerbConcrete Pin kerbConcrete Pin KerbSection 7.3.2 provides more detail and identifies readily available stock items, however it isrecommended that a stock <strong>of</strong> material is procured <strong>for</strong> long term maintenance purposes.Details relating to seating, lighting and planting design associated with site circulation areidentified in fur<strong>the</strong>r sections.Part 7 | W ayfinding11 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>7.2.0 GRAPHIC DESIGNThis section refers to <strong>the</strong> new style <strong>of</strong> signage being introduced across <strong>the</strong> Campus.This section should be read in conjunction with 7.4 External Signage <strong>Guide</strong>lines, which isa reproduction <strong>of</strong> a document issued separately by UWE Marketing & Communications.7.2.1 Formal Way-finding SignageGraphic design is critical to <strong>the</strong> effective use <strong>of</strong> <strong>for</strong>mal way-finding elements and should beemployed when designing “tools” such as web based literature, leaflets, handouts andreoccurring logos on Campus buildings and street furniture.A suite <strong>of</strong> new <strong>for</strong>mal signage and in<strong>for</strong>mation boards was agreed in 2010. The aim <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>suite was to radically enhance <strong>the</strong> successful movement and destination finding experience<strong>of</strong> people through <strong>the</strong> campus. The appropriate placement <strong>of</strong> required signs has beendrawn from research undertaken by <strong>the</strong> UWE Estates Team with close attention to <strong>the</strong>masterplan. Intersections and nodes were identified as part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> site selection criteria <strong>for</strong>signage where maximum impact could be achieved.The signage art work uses colours and tints taken from UWE brand guidelines resulting anew colour palette to highlight routes loosely based on <strong>the</strong> London Underground system.7.2.2 Graphic <strong>Design</strong>: Signage ParametersThe signage and in<strong>for</strong>mation boards (see Figures) have been in<strong>for</strong>med by <strong>the</strong> followinggraphic principles. Future design teams will be expected to liaise with UWE Estates team toidentify <strong>the</strong> location <strong>for</strong> new signage and ensure that <strong>the</strong> appropriate <strong>for</strong>m <strong>of</strong> sign isdelivered in accordance with <strong>the</strong> agreed design approach.• The key routes are separately identified on plan and placed at <strong>the</strong> top <strong>of</strong> signs toovercome any issues <strong>of</strong> colour blindness• Main campus buildings are shown in a red tint• Main paths, roads, and car parking areas in grey• A dark background gives a strong contrast to <strong>the</strong> various components.• Pale green spaces shown depict ‘tranquil’ areas within <strong>the</strong> campus.• All important accessible car parks, lifts and toilets are clearly visible.• A ‘heads up’ plans across <strong>the</strong> coloured routes - a term used to describe <strong>the</strong> angle <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>plan when viewed (<strong>the</strong> ‘You are here’ position <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> visitor indicated at <strong>the</strong> bottom <strong>of</strong><strong>the</strong> plan with everything immediately facing <strong>the</strong> visitor in each ‘zoom in’ plan).• A wider context campus plans and ‘zoom ins’ that show a close up, immediateenvironment plan to aid decisions and confirm location and destination.• Starting from <strong>the</strong> initial base layers <strong>the</strong> plans have a simple, flat colour treatment andeach given a separate key <strong>for</strong> supporting text to avoid clutter.• A set <strong>of</strong> clear, stylised pictograms are used to illustrate generic areas such as toilets,lifts etc In some areas, tricky elements such as indoor routes, underpasses, gradientsand steps required a simply graphic treatment.• Signage specifications and artwork templates are held by UWE Facilities and EstatesPart 7 | W ayfinding12 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>Examples <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> UWE Signs Typical UWE FingerpostExtracts from <strong>the</strong> UWE signsPart 7 | W ayfinding13 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>7.3.0 TECHNICAL ANNEX7.3.1 Circulation spaces and routesThis presents design approaches covering routes widths and treatments <strong>for</strong> shared spaces,primary, secondary and tertiary routes, cycle only routes and service trenches.7.3.2 Materials SpecificationThis recommends a restricted palette <strong>of</strong> materials <strong>for</strong> application in edges, finishes andtactile surfacing.7.3.3 Nodes and intersectionsPotential design approaches <strong>for</strong> major traffic/pedestrian crossing, secondary junctions,pedestrian intersections and buildings entrances are provided, identifying in plain <strong>for</strong>m <strong>the</strong>general arrangements <strong>of</strong> design elements and treatments. Respite areas, large and small,and event spaces are also covered.7.3.4 Street FurnitureA restricted palette <strong>of</strong>: benches and seating; bins and enclosures; cycle storage; plantersand; retaining elements are recommended.7.3.5 Assessment ToolAs explained in <strong>the</strong> introduction, designs <strong>for</strong> primary routes must be justified with referenceto <strong>the</strong> main headings set out within <strong>the</strong> Assessment Tool. This is to be used by both <strong>the</strong>design team in helping to “test” <strong>the</strong> suitability <strong>of</strong> emerging designs, and by UWE, should itso wish, to audit <strong>the</strong> design process and be used to in<strong>for</strong>m internal sign-<strong>of</strong>f processes. Forsmaller scale projects, a sub-set <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> issues included will be determined by UWE at <strong>the</strong>start <strong>of</strong> each commission.Part 7 | W ayfinding14 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>All to be Confirmed following Master Plan Review:7.3.1 Circulation spaces and routes7.3.2 Materials Specification7.3.3 Nodes and intersections7.3.4 Street FurnitureThis in<strong>for</strong>mation is to be confirmed April 2012Part 7 | W ayfinding15 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>7.3.5 Assessment Tool<strong>Design</strong> teams should follow guidance set out in <strong>the</strong> Wayfinding <strong>Guide</strong> in <strong>the</strong> context <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>wider aspirations <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> Campus as set out in <strong>the</strong> Masterplan. This assessment tool shouldbe used to describe and justify <strong>the</strong> design approach taken with reference to <strong>the</strong>fundamental principles described in <strong>the</strong> guide. Questions are prompts <strong>for</strong> consideration bydesigners when preparing a response to each <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> main headings.Evaluation Criteria<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance1<strong>Design</strong>ers are required to identify how <strong>the</strong>irproposals will address <strong>the</strong> key issues listed in<strong>the</strong> headings below and make reference tobest practice.Site Circulation<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance1.11.21.31.41.51.61.72How does <strong>the</strong> design proposal contribute toimproved access to and from <strong>the</strong> Campusfacilities and to <strong>the</strong> student experience?Where relevant describe <strong>the</strong> provision within<strong>the</strong> design <strong>for</strong> future public transport.How does <strong>the</strong> proposed route clearly andeffectively link spaces in line with <strong>the</strong>masterplan?How are <strong>the</strong> pedestrian and cycle zonesdifferentiated along routes where both sharespace?Identify what maximum distances andgradients along routes are required to deliveran inclusive environment, accessible to all.Identify how <strong>the</strong> design embraces <strong>the</strong>restricted palette <strong>of</strong> materialsHow does <strong>the</strong> proposed route providingrespite <strong>for</strong> pedestrians?Nodes and Intersections<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance2.12.22.32.42.52.6Identify how inter-connections between <strong>the</strong>“route design” and <strong>the</strong> wider aspirations <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>masterplan have been addressed.How are intersects with o<strong>the</strong>r primary, andsecondary and tertiary routes resolved?How are small congregation or resting/respitespace embraced within <strong>the</strong> proposal tomaximise <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> quiet spaces away from<strong>the</strong> active spaces?How do <strong>the</strong> proposals clearly define prioritymovement <strong>of</strong> pedestrians at intersections?How do <strong>the</strong> proposals make use <strong>of</strong> contrastingsurface materials, features and landscapedesign elements to provoke a navigationdecision?Describe <strong>the</strong> provision <strong>of</strong> respite areas atnodes and intersections to facilitate <strong>the</strong> needsPart 7 | W ayfinding16 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>2.73<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> campus population.Identify how <strong>the</strong> proposals create a visualonward connection to <strong>the</strong> next destinationbuilding, space or facility.Access and Inclusive design<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance3.13.23.33.43.53.63.73.84Provide explanation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> design approach inrelation to <strong>the</strong> following inclusive designcriteria:Logistics: The necessity to plan onesmovement to avoid protracted or problematicroutes to destinations.Legibility: The necessity to achieve clear,logical and efficient navigation through anEnvironment.Clarity: The necessity to make sense <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>visual and audible in<strong>for</strong>mation available withinan environment.Tranquillity: The need to find alternatives toplaces <strong>of</strong> high sensory or social intensity.Ergonomics: The need <strong>for</strong> taking account <strong>of</strong>differing dexterity, size, ability and / or needwhen incorporating any physical feature.Desirable: The need to arrive at equitablesolutions evident as a result <strong>of</strong> devisingelegant solutions that include provision <strong>for</strong>people’s different needs.Enjoyable: The aim <strong>of</strong> designing andimplementing a scheme design so thatenjoyment can be experienced by everyone.Rationalisation <strong>of</strong> Furniture & Features<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance4.14.24.35How is <strong>the</strong> street furniture arranged within <strong>the</strong>proposals to benefit inclusive communalactivity?Identify how <strong>the</strong> proposals improve visualconnections along routes, within busy externalspaces and routes into buildings?How lighting, CCTV, event boards,promotional flags etc can be installed toreduce site clutter?Legibility & Circulation<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance5.15.25.3How does Street furniture and plantingdesigns complement and enhance <strong>the</strong>essential way-finding principles <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> guide.Identify how <strong>the</strong> proposals maximisepedestrian movement and minimiseopportunist circulation through landscapeareas.Identify how <strong>the</strong> proposals improve visualconnections along routes, within busy externalPart 7 | W ayfinding17 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>spaces and routes into buildings?5.45.55.65.75.86How have conflicts in use with servicing andvehicles and erosion <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> s<strong>of</strong>t landscapebeen resolved in <strong>the</strong> proposals.How do <strong>the</strong> proposals creating a sense <strong>of</strong>“here and <strong>the</strong>re” to draws people from onespace to ano<strong>the</strong>r?Describe how framed and glimpsed views arepromoted within <strong>the</strong> proposals creatingopportunity <strong>for</strong> in<strong>for</strong>mal wayfinding andsubconscious reference points.Describe how <strong>the</strong> principle <strong>of</strong> shared surfacedesign has been embraced within <strong>the</strong>proposal to prioritise pedestrian movement.How is <strong>the</strong> division <strong>of</strong> cycle and pedestriancirculation achieved within <strong>the</strong> proposals?Sustainability<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance6.16.26.36.47How are site materials used to positivelycontribute to <strong>the</strong> campus environment throughconsidered design?Demonstrate how site soil is managedavoiding <strong>the</strong> need <strong>for</strong> imported materials.What materials in <strong>the</strong> proposal are locallysourced?How do <strong>the</strong> proposals minimise energy use inits design, installation and maintenance?Ecology<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance7.17.28Describe how valuable ecological habitats areproposed <strong>for</strong> retention.Identify how habitats are to be enhanced andcreated within <strong>the</strong> commission to maximisebenefits to ecology <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> campus.Site lighting<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance8.18.28.38.48.59Identify <strong>the</strong> range <strong>of</strong> lighting within <strong>the</strong>proposals and its intended per<strong>for</strong>mance.Confirm <strong>the</strong> proposals lighting provisions andrelate to latest BS standards and best practiceguidance.Identify how <strong>the</strong> lighting design considerssustainabilityHow is <strong>the</strong> lighting incorporated within <strong>the</strong>proposals to ensure ease <strong>of</strong> maintenance?How is feature lighting being used within <strong>the</strong>proposals to facilitate Wayfinding and create asense <strong>of</strong> place?Site Furniture<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /MaintenancePart 7 | W ayfinding18 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>9.19.29.39.49.59.610Identify <strong>the</strong> piece <strong>of</strong> street furniture to be usedand how <strong>the</strong>y comply with <strong>the</strong> guide.Describe <strong>the</strong> use and distribution <strong>of</strong> sitefurniture products within <strong>the</strong> proposals.Identify <strong>the</strong> maintenance and replacementstrategy <strong>for</strong> furniture proposed.Identify <strong>the</strong> finishes to handrails and railings.How are surfaces surrounding site furnituredetailed to minimise maintenance andreplacement costs?Identify where materials are sourced anddescribe how a sustainable approach designand procurement is used.Surfacing Materials<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance10.1How are <strong>the</strong> materials from <strong>the</strong> restrictivepalettes used to provide distinctive detaildesign solutions?10.210.310.410.511How will replacements <strong>for</strong> any bespokematerials used in proposals be secured <strong>for</strong>future remedial works?Identify <strong>the</strong> maintenance strategy <strong>for</strong> selectedmaterials.How is <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> hazard warning surfacingintegrated within <strong>the</strong> proposals to achieve bestpractice and an integrated design solution?How are surface materials coordinated withservice corridors <strong>for</strong> future servicing andassociated remedial works?Cycle storage provision<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance11.111.212Describe <strong>the</strong> cycle storage provision in <strong>the</strong>proposals and its relationship to <strong>the</strong> site widestrategy <strong>for</strong> cycle storage.How is security <strong>of</strong> cycles addressed within <strong>the</strong>proposals?Signage - Formal Wayfinding<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance12.112.212.312.413Describe <strong>the</strong> integration <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> UWE “branded”signage details within <strong>the</strong> proposals.How is rationalisation <strong>of</strong> directional signageachieved within <strong>the</strong> proposals?Confirm <strong>the</strong> use and type <strong>of</strong> traditional <strong>for</strong>malWayfinding elements used and how <strong>the</strong>y aredynamic, exciting and functional.How are proposed signage elementspositioned in relation to surroundinglandscape elements at key decision makinglocations?In<strong>for</strong>mal Wayfinding<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /MaintenancePart 7 | W ayfinding19 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>13.113.214How are in<strong>for</strong>mal wayfinding opportunitiesembraced in <strong>the</strong> proposals through <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong>expressive design elements to per<strong>for</strong>m andfacilitate way-finding.How can existing built elements on site beused as in<strong>for</strong>mal Wayfinding opportunities aspart <strong>of</strong> a coordinated strategy?Tree Planting Strategy<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance14.114.214.314.414.414.515How do <strong>the</strong> proposals interface with existingtrees on site and, what is <strong>the</strong> provision <strong>for</strong> treeprotection?How does <strong>the</strong> proposed tree plantingcontribute to <strong>the</strong> green infrastructure andecology <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Campus?Identify how <strong>the</strong> tree planting and specificationcontributes to Wayfinding?How does tree planting affect <strong>the</strong> microclimate<strong>of</strong> adjacent spaces and buildings?How is tree planting arranged within <strong>the</strong>proposals to promote successfulestablishment and minimise maintenance?What measures are in place to protect existingand proposed services from future rootgrowth?Servicing<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance15.115.215.3Describe how <strong>the</strong> containment <strong>of</strong> bins/skipscould integrate with <strong>the</strong> proposals andcoordinate with a UWE refuge strategy.How is <strong>the</strong> conflict between pedestriancirculation and servicing <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> campusachieved in <strong>the</strong> proposals?Demonstrate how waste storage facilities andcollection routes are coordinated.15.416How do <strong>the</strong> proposals achieve secure andeasily maintained compounds which arereceived in <strong>the</strong> landscape?Microclimate<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance16.116.217Identify how <strong>the</strong> proposals focus <strong>the</strong> user inareas <strong>of</strong> natural com<strong>for</strong>t.How is microclimate enhanced <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> com<strong>for</strong>t<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> pedestrian in <strong>the</strong> proposals?Earth works and land <strong>for</strong>ms<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance17.117.2How are significant level changes addressedand what methods <strong>of</strong> retaining levels areproposed.How are banks and bunds integrated in <strong>the</strong>proposals to maintain views and legibility <strong>of</strong>space?Part 7 | W ayfinding20 | P age


UWE <strong>Design</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Buildings</strong>17.318What gradient and finish is specified in <strong>the</strong>proposals to eliminate health and safetyissues?Security fencing and walls<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance18.118.218.318.419How are secure boundary fences integratedwithin <strong>the</strong> proposals to avoid a hostileenvironment.How are barriers designing out within publicrealm?How are dwarf walls <strong>for</strong> incidental seatingincorporated in <strong>the</strong> proposals?How are blank walls and building elevationsused <strong>for</strong> in<strong>for</strong>mal wayfinding andadvertisement?Secure by design:<strong>Design</strong> TeamResponseManagement /Maintenance19.119.219.319.4Describe design measures in <strong>the</strong> landscapewhich improve security <strong>of</strong> public and propertywhist maintaining a quality landscapeenvironment.How is hedging in car park areas specified tomaintain views <strong>for</strong> orientation and passivesurveillance required <strong>for</strong> personal safety?What provision is made within <strong>the</strong> proposal todefined exits and aid escape?What measures are taken within <strong>the</strong> proposalsand landscape design to reduce anti socialand criminal behaviour?Part 7 | W ayfinding21 | P age


7.4 External Signage <strong>Guide</strong>lines 20117.4.1 Introduction / Purpose:The signage guidelines have been produced with <strong>the</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong> creating a consistentimage across <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong> <strong>for</strong> all visitors to <strong>the</strong> campus. By providing improvements towayfinding in<strong>for</strong>mation and introducing a variety <strong>of</strong> signage <strong>for</strong>mats, UWE can improve <strong>the</strong>support and overall experience <strong>for</strong> people visiting <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong>, making <strong>the</strong>m feel welcomeand com<strong>for</strong>table whilst reducing stress. The key benefits include:• Improved wayfinding signage and in<strong>for</strong>mation will rein<strong>for</strong>ce <strong>the</strong> character and attraction<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> campus and add to <strong>the</strong> community feel.• Communicates a new pedestrian network <strong>of</strong> routes through <strong>the</strong> campus.• A systematic approach ensures continuity, simplicity and cost efficiency whenspecifying and procuring new or replacement signage.• Maintenance and replacement costs can be minimised through <strong>the</strong> consistent use <strong>of</strong> alimited but long lasting range <strong>of</strong> products and design detail.• This also enables an opportunity <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>University</strong>’s ‘corporate identity’ and brand to beclearly distinguished and visually communicated throughout <strong>the</strong> campus.7.4.2 External Vehicular Signage:This signage has to meet <strong>the</strong> needs <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> vehicular–borne user, and so needs to be clearlyreadable while moving along a road (albeit at 20 miles per hour). There<strong>for</strong>e, <strong>the</strong> keyobjective <strong>of</strong> this type <strong>of</strong> sign is to identify any area where a vehicle might travel and park,(e.g. car park, Centre <strong>for</strong> Sport, student village, i.e. a zone). It is not intended to highlight aspecific building or venue. (These are covered by pedestrian way finding material whichguides <strong>the</strong> visitor from <strong>the</strong>ir car park to <strong>the</strong>ir wend destination).The adaptation <strong>of</strong> current signage has, <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> most part used vinyl in order to re-useexisting system a D end support posts painted black (Figure 1). For fur<strong>the</strong>r signageinstallations a suitable system has been specified.a) Post & Plank Signage SpecificationUse Spandex Infopanel System or equivalent.Contact Details <strong>for</strong> Spandex:Spandex Ltd1600 Park Avenue, Aztec <strong>West</strong>Almondsbury, Bristol, BS32 4UATel: 01454 616 444b) PostsSign pole 80mm “D” Section posts to be used powder coated Satin Black withAluminium caps.c) PlanksFor horizontal panels use Spandex double sided Infopanel powder coated white.Plank depths should normally be 200mm (although some re-used planks measure300mm).The lengths used should be 1200mm.d) TextThe efficiency <strong>of</strong> this sign system relies heavily on <strong>the</strong> ability <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> user to detect, recogniseand read <strong>the</strong> sign. There<strong>for</strong>e contrast between letters, symbols and <strong>the</strong>ir background isessential.Part 7 | W ayfinding22 | P age


• The typeface used should always be ‘Frutiger 65 Bold’. To improve legibility, type willalways be upper and lower case, with capitals (100mm) used <strong>for</strong> <strong>the</strong> start <strong>of</strong> each mainword followed by lower case (80mm).• The range <strong>of</strong> type sixes used in <strong>the</strong> system should be kept to a minimum. If smallertype face is needed to include in<strong>for</strong>mation, sizes are 80mm capitals and 60mm lowercase.• Colour will always be bold black on white following <strong>the</strong> principles <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> Highwaycommission.• The texts should be grouped <strong>for</strong> each direction with a single arrow <strong>for</strong> each destination.• Directional in<strong>for</strong>mation will be listed in an order governed by <strong>the</strong> destination hierarchy,<strong>the</strong> nearest being <strong>the</strong> first.7.4.3 External Pedestrian SignageThe primary purpose <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> pedestrian monolith (Figure 2) is to provide direction andlocation in<strong>for</strong>mation to assist visitors, students and staff to find <strong>the</strong>ir way around <strong>the</strong> campuseasily and confidently. The monoliths construction is designed to be very robust and longlasting on <strong>the</strong> campus environment, whilst retaining <strong>the</strong> flexibility to be moved around <strong>the</strong>site. It also represents a consistent interpretation <strong>of</strong> UWE’s corporate image and is in linewith current DDA best practice thinking.• The signs <strong>of</strong>fer a double sided in<strong>for</strong>mation panel showing an overview <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> campusbuildings and 4 primary routes across <strong>the</strong> campus.• Finger boards are also used at <strong>the</strong> top <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> monolith as directional indicators whichare colour coded according to <strong>the</strong> relevant route. (Detailed parameters are includedbelow).• Exact installation details and specifications are shown on <strong>the</strong> following pages.Part 7 | W ayfinding23 | P age


Part 7 | W ayfinding24 | P age


Part 7 | W ayfinding25 | P age


Part 7 | W ayfinding26 | P age


7.4.4 Maps• The maps displayed on <strong>the</strong> in<strong>for</strong>mation panels at entry points show <strong>the</strong> whole campusin both two-dimension and a three-dimensional artists impression <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> site, toge<strong>the</strong>rwith a legend which also includes useful contact in<strong>for</strong>mation and walk time. A bold ‘Youare Here’ red flash is included.• As <strong>the</strong> pedestrian progresses towards <strong>the</strong> interior <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> campus, <strong>the</strong>re is a zoom-inmap <strong>for</strong> each area to provide more detailed in<strong>for</strong>mation using pictograms as much aspossible. It is accompanied by a small image <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> whole campus (showing routes andbuilding identification only with a ‘you are here’ to allow <strong>the</strong> pedestrian to stay inperspective <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir location and overall context).• Each panel has been custom designed – so additional panels will require new artworkdesign. However all in<strong>for</strong>mation about <strong>the</strong> campus is held on <strong>the</strong> master campus mapheld by Marketing & Communications, who have agreed to make necessaryamendments to <strong>the</strong> panel maps once a year (June/July).• The map and legend is printed onto vinyl <strong>for</strong> flexible and cost effective replacement.• The main campus maps contain key in<strong>for</strong>mation such as accessible and standardtoilets at ground level (or ‘up one level’), main entrances to buildings, refreshmentopportunities, main reception, student’s union, library and any venue which is deemedto e external facing in terms <strong>of</strong> use. A ‘Faculty entrance’ has been agreed <strong>for</strong> each <strong>of</strong><strong>the</strong> four faculties. No o<strong>the</strong>r in<strong>for</strong>mation regarding individual departments should beincluded.• The first phase <strong>of</strong> 12 in<strong>for</strong>mation panels and appropriate stand alone finger postspopulated <strong>the</strong> main areas. Fur<strong>the</strong>r locations have been identified and 14 panels andfinger posts will be installed in Spring 2011. A tender process has been undertaken <strong>for</strong>a total order <strong>of</strong> 40 by end 2012. The successful supplier is ‘Create’.• It is anticipated that each panel will require updating each year. A replacement price <strong>of</strong>£38 per map panel has been agreed.7.4.5 Finger BoardsThe aim <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> fingerboards (Figure 3) is to reassure orientation and direction <strong>of</strong> travel andsecondly to highlight key services in <strong>the</strong> immediate proximity including toilets andrefreshment outlets.• Finger boards can only be positioned on one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> eight compass points. Positioning<strong>of</strong> new finger posts should be as near a possible to <strong>the</strong> direction <strong>of</strong> travel.• Main reception and main services e.g. library and student’s union to be marked onevery monolith.• All destinations that fall on a route will be marked with <strong>the</strong> route colour.• Main food outlets including <strong>the</strong> One Zone and restaurant can be seen as a mainservice. Local cafes and food outlets can be marked ei<strong>the</strong>r by name or pictogram.• Signing blocks and buildings should be avoided unless <strong>the</strong>y are standalone or if <strong>the</strong>irmain entrance falls <strong>of</strong>f a main pedestrian route.• Faculty entrances should be marked with a numbered star logo.• Main and visitor car parks should be marked when approach is nearer.• Pictograms should be used where possible.• Layout is detailed below.Part 7 | W ayfinding27 | P age


7.4.6 Entrance Fixed Signage:• Each faculty has nominated one entrance that will be highlighted on <strong>the</strong> main map.This entrance will have a major ‘branded’ sign that contains <strong>the</strong> name f <strong>the</strong> faculty andits departments. 900mm x 700mm.• All o<strong>the</strong>r entrances to buildings will contain <strong>the</strong> name <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> building i.e. <strong>the</strong> letter <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>block (DVC directive). These signs will have solid UWE branded red background withwhite VAG lettering with dimensions 350mm x 350mm.• If <strong>the</strong> sign is to be fitted to glazing a vinyl sticker should be used.• If masonry fixing is required a powder coated aluminium tray system should be used.Part 7 | W ayfinding28 | P age

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!